An Abridged History Of The United States Psychopathocracy

Lifting the Veil

An Investigative History of the United States Pathocracy

Researched and Written by Timothy M. Silver

“I know the capacity that is there to make tyranny total in America. We must see to it that this agency and all agencies that possess this technology operate within the law and under proper supervision, so that we never cross over that abyss. That is the abyss from which there is no return.”

~~  U.S. Senator Frank Church, 1975¹

Note: All research validated by over 500 footnotes with links provided to reliable sources.

1 Quoted by Pentagon Papers whistleblower Dan Ellsberg from his article in the UK’s Guardian, “Edward Snowden: saving us from the United Stasi of America,” June 10, 2013

* * * *

[Editor’s Note] Lifting the Veil is the best single summary revealing the deepest levels of deception in our world we’ve seen. It uses highly reliable sources on almost everything presented with links to verify it all. If you don’t have time to read the entire piece, skim the highlighted sections and don’t miss chapter XIII which presents undeniable proof of cults made up of psychopaths hell bent on dominating and controlling our world. You will learn how they are able to keep all of this out of the eye of the public. This is a must read for all who want to be educated and join in building a brighter future for ourselves and for future generations.

“The problem of the Pathocracy seems to be so vast and complex; it is certainly intimidating. We are fortunate that the solutions are relatively simple. It begins and ends with education and non-participation. Ignorance is the sole tool that keeps the Pathocracy afloat. It’s truly this easy. An awake populace can collectively choose to stop holding the pyramid above their shoulders by refusing to oil the gears of the machine. We need to collectively move our money out of big banks, support local enterprise over multinational corporations, and be excessively vocal about the truth.”

Index

Preface

Chapter I: The War on Terror is a Fraud

Chapter II: The One-Party State

Chapter III: Psychopathy, Power and Politics

Chapter IV: Operation Paperclip

Chapter V: MK-ULTRA

Chapter VI: Operation Gladio

Chapter VII: Operation Mockingbird

Chapter VIII: COINTELPRO

Chapter IX: The Phoenix Program

Chapter X: Iran/Contra

Chapter XI: Continuity of Government

Chapter XII: The Pedophocracy

Chapter XIII: Cults and Child Abuse

Chapter XIV: Trauma-Based Mind Control

Chapter XV: The Pathocracy

Chapter XVI: Solutions

Chapter XVII: The Awakening

* * * *

Preface

It has been a little over a year since I first read about the Central Intelligence Agency program known as MK-ULTRA, which was dedicated to exploring the vast possibilities of ‘biological behavioral engineering’, also known as mind control. I was stunned by the depth of the horror unleashed on the unwitting victims of the program, less than a decade removed from the Nuremberg Trials which concluded that never again should scientists experiment on subjects without their willing consent.

I was impressed that the Agency (CIA) deftly avoided any significant reform, even after multiple congressional inquiries into their illegal, unconstitutional activities which the disclosure of MK-ULTRA prompted, and was disturbed by the complete lack of information regarding the program in the general public. Most shocking, despite Agency insistence to the contrary, was the documented evidence that their mission of controlling the human mind bore significant fruit.

As an aspiring historian, I set off to work on turning over every stone related to covert intelligence activities and other suppressed history, created the pen name Morgan Martell and began publishing my research on a blog titled ‘The Peoples History’. Since then, I have read dozens of books and thousands of mainstream media articles, interviews, scientific studies and primary documents in my quest for knowledge.

Before long I came to the understanding that I was not just learning about a series of unrelated clandestine agency abuses and financial crimes, but rather was researching various disclosures of an organized subversive network working behind the scenes. A bold statement like this requires bold evidence, of course, and I invite you to investigate the over 500 citations of publicly available, mainstream sources yourself and come to your own conclusions.

I used the name Morgan Martell for a brief period because I was worried that my work would attract the wrong kind of attention. In fact, when I first wrote about the MK-ULTRA project, I deliberately omitted some information, not because I thought it was unimportant or that it lacked sufficient documentation, but because some of the documented history is so shocking that I was afraid to write about it.

The revelations of Edward Snowden, beginning on June 6, 2013, changed my mind about the secrecy. The NSA knows exactly who I am and what I am researching, so you might as well too. I promise that nothing I have learned which can be corroborated has been left out of this book, even when facing the depths of depravity unleashed by certain psychopaths in position of power.

Whether you are approaching this work from a vantage point of exploring new ideas, learning more about topics that already interest you, or if you are antagonistic to the idea that something is ‘not quite right’ with the United States today, I urge you to have an open mind and to be prepared to synthesize new information into your worldview.

Every day I strive to learn new things and explore new ideas, a fact which has delayed the release of this book for some months as I continuously refined and expanded the thesis. If you have alternative ideas you would like to share, criticism to offer, or have additional research that would augment this work, please do not hesitate to contact me. I thoroughly enjoy the correspondence.

‘Lifting the Veil’ is structured in a way that discusses two startling problems with the current political system in the United States today, and then jumps to 1946 and works forward in time to shed light on how these problems came about. Woven in is information on psychopathy and its relationship to politics and power, my own conclusions drawn from the information, and ‘food for thought’ questions. The final portion of the book ties together the pieces of the puzzle and presents potential, non-partisan solutions we can take to affect change.

I ask one thing from you, the reader, before embarking on this journey. Once you finish, if you believe that this work is important, please resolve yourself to share it with at least two people, whether they are someone you know in real life, online acquaintances or anonymous recipients. I have released this book free for a reason. It is the only way this information will spread to a point where it will reach a ‘critical mass’. Once it does, change will be inevitable. Lets endeavor to make this happen as soon as possible.

Thanks for reading,
Timothy M. Silver
timsilverpeopleshistory@gmail.com

* * * *

Chapter I: The War on Terror is a Fraud

“In the mid-’80s, if you remember… Saudi Arabia and the United States were supporting the Mujahideen to liberate Afghanistan from the Soviets. He [Osama bin Laden] came to thank me for my efforts to bring the Americans, our friends, to help us against the atheists, he said the communists. Isn’t it ironic?” – Prince Bandar bin Sultan of Saudi Arabia, on Larry King Live²

President Reagan meets with members of the Mujahideen in the Oval Office, 1985

In 2009, a series of events occurred that ought to have raised questions in the press. First, the United States began a troop surge in Afghanistan designed to deliver the final blow to the Taliban insurgency.³ Then the United States provided a $7.5 billion aid package to Pakistan.⁴

Around the same time, the Carnegie Foundation published a study which revealed a majority of Pakistan aid goes to the intelligence agency ISI and the military.⁵ The problem with these three events is that earlier in the year, U.S. officials revealed to the New York Times that the ISI was funding the Taliban, and was responsible for providing direct assistance and helping with some of their strategic strikes.⁶

The press did cover these stories, but independent of one another. Not one media institution connected the dots that the United States was actively funding the harm that its armed forces were simultaneously fighting. Following the official narrative of the war, it certainly doesn’t make any sense that the United States was indirectly prolonging the quagmire.

Perhaps such mistakes are the inevitability of a bloated war bureaucracy, or that U.S. officials simply didn’t realize the connection. Unfortunately, a collection of evidence points to a more sinister explanation: the United States and its allies have been deliberately proliferating radical Islam for decades, only to later spend trillions fighting the enemy they created, thus generating huge war profits for Wall Street moguls.

Just days after the July 7, 2005 London terror attack, and less than a month before his untimely death, the Right Honorable Robin Cook, former UK Foreign Secretary, wrote a scathing and emotional review of the War on Terror in The Guardian.

“Bin Laden was, though, a product of a monumental miscalculation by western security agencies. Throughout the ’80s he was armed by the CIA and funded by the Saudis to wage jihad against the Russian occupation of Afghanistan. Al-Qaida, literally “the base“, was originally the computer data-base of the thousands of mujahideen who were recruited and trained with help from the CIA to defeat the Russians. Inexplicably, and with disastrous consequences, it never appears to have occurred to Washington that once Russia was out of the way, Bin Laden’s organization would turn its attention to the west.”⁷

While Cook’s remarks were downplayed and ridiculed by the mainstream media and the United Kingdom establishment at the time, available evidence shows his assertions to be largely correct.

2 CNN, “America’s New War: Responding to Terrorism,” October 1, 2001

3 Wall Street Journal, “Obama Bets Big on Troop Surge”, December 2, 2009. In 2009, Barack Obama ordered a surge of 30,000 troops in Afghanistan to fight the War on Terror.

4 Newsweek, “A Timeline of U.S. Aid to Pakistan”, October 20, 2009. The $7.5 Billion in aid to Pakistan tripled previous agreements, and locked in the economic alliance for another 5 years.

5 Carnegie Foundation,“Who Benefits from aid to Pakistan?”

6 New York Times, “Afghan Strikes By Taliban Get Pakistan Help, U.S. Aides Say,” March 25, 2009

7 The Guardian, “The Struggle Against Terrorism Cannot Be Won By Military Means,” July 8, 2005. A great article written by Robert Cook, whose life was tragically cut short within a year of its publication from a heart attack. Worth reading in its entirety. Watch U.S. Senate testimony about the development of a poison dart pistol which can cause a heart attack and leave no trace indicating assassination.

* * * *

Operation Cyclone

“They [the CIA] told me these people were fanatical, and the more fierce they were the more fiercely they would fight the Soviets… I warned them that we were creating a monster.” – Scholar Selig Harrison⁸

The story begins in 1978 shortly after the Saur Revolution, which resulted in the communist People’s Democratic Party of Afghanistan gaining control of the Afghanistan government. The CIA immediately initiated a program known as Operation Cyclone and began funding militant Islamic groups favored by the Pakistani intelligence agency ISI, to the tune of $7.5 billion.⁹ The money went to producing, training, and arming militant Islamic radicals who were directed towards fighting the secular communist government.

At the time, the Mujahideen was composed of many different, loosely organized groups encompassing a broad spectrum of ideologies, with widely varying perspectives on religion, society and state. Seven major Afghan factions began receiving aid, three of them Islamic moderates and four of them Islamic fundamentalists as defined by the military. In addition to native Afghans, they were composed of many foreigners who traveled to fight the invasion, such as Osama bin Laden himself.¹⁰

To understand the scope of the funding, the BBC stated that the CIA provided enough arms to equip a 240,000 man army, and Saudi Arabia matched them dollar for dollar.¹¹ The weapons given to these fighters were not just AK-47s and other simple arms. Many were high tech, such as Stinger Anti-Aircraft missiles,¹² provided with the intention of demoralizing Soviet commanders and soldiers.¹³

The majority of the funding was funneled through Pakistan’s ISI, which acted as an arm of CIA interests and began setting up religious schools known as Madrassas in Pakistan cities and frontier areas, churning out tens of thousands of students who would join the Mujahideen.¹⁴ (Note: Madrassas are not inherently negative institutions, however the ones who received funding from the CIA were particularly radical).

All of this began before the Soviets invaded Afghanistan. A full six months, according to Zbigniew Brzezinski, President Carter’s National Security Advisor, who recalled his involvement to a French news magazine in 1998:

“We didn’t push the Russians to intervene, but we knowingly increased the probability that they would… That secret operation was an excellent idea. It had the effect of drawing the Soviets into the Afghan trap. The day that the Soviets officially crossed the border I wrote to President Carter, ‘We now have the opportunity of giving the Soviet Union its Vietnam War.'”¹⁵

8 Selig’s full comments available here.

9 Figure taken from Pakistan Institute of Legislative Development and Transparency, in a briefing to the Pakistan parliament.

10 The major factions who received aid are detailed in an article published in the Journal of Slavic Military Studies, written by Retired Army Col. Lester W. Grau.

11 BBC, “Pakistan’s Shadowy Secret Service,” October 9, 2006

12 Slate, “Stingers, Stingers, Who’s Got The Stingers?” October 3, 2001

13 Washington Post, “Osama bin Laden Created By The US,” 1992

14 BBC, “Pakistan’s Shadowy Secret Service,” October 9, 2006

15 Bilveer Singh, “The Talibanization of Southeast Asia,” Excerpt available here.

* * * *

Early Years of Osama Bin Laden

When Osama bin Laden arrived in Afghanistan from Saudi Arabia, he created a group called Maktab al-Khidamat, abbreviated as MAK, a precursor to Al-Qaeda. It is frequently claimed that the CIA directly funded this group, though top CIA officers say that this is not the case. It has been confirmed, at least, that the MAK did receive funding from the ISI,¹⁶ the CIA’s primary conduit for conducting their covert war against Russia.

CIA Station Chief in Afghanistan Milt Bearden has stated that he was well aware of Bin Laden in the Mujahideen, and welcomed his efforts in funding, though he never met with him personally.¹⁷ Bin Laden also brought in construction equipment from his father’s company Saudi Binladen Group, considered the largest construction firm in the world, to build training camps, in collaboration with the ISI and CIA.¹⁸

In 1986, Osama used his construction assets to build a CIA-financed tunnel complex to serve as a training facility. It was also a major arms and medical depot for the Mujahideen in the Peshawar mountains near Pakistan which was later used by Al-Qaeda.¹⁹

Fifteen years later, the Western Media would describe Al-Qaeda as hiding out in caves, but the truth is a little more complex: there were intricate tunnels connecting hundreds of different caves, a majority of them man-made, equipped with irrigation systems, accommodation for trucks and even tanks, hotels, mosques, arms depots, medical and radio centers, and kitchens.²⁰ In short, it is more accurate to call them mountain fortresses.

Al-Qaeda was formed sometime between 1987-88, with the radical elements of MAK joining after their group split.

It is apparent that the CIA had no plan to deal with the tunnel complex after the conclusion of Operation Cyclone, though surely that must have been aware that the cadre of radicals they were instrumental in producing would not simply disappear or de-radicalize. Perhaps long term destabilization of the country was their plan all along.

16 Information taken from GlobalSecurity.org, a respected institution in the intelligence community.

17 David Helms and Norm Dixon, “Behind the US War in Afghanistan.”

18 New York Times, “The Most Wanted Face of Terrorism”, May 2, 2011.

19 The Pittsburgh Post-Gazette, “How a Holy War Against the Soviets Turned Against the US,” September 23, 2001. Written by respected investigative journalist and Middle-East insider Ahmed Rashid

20 Mir Bahmanyar, “Afghanistan Cave Complexes 1979-2004: Mountain strongholds of the Mujahideen.”

* * * *

The Taliban

Evidence suggests that the Taliban is actively involved with Al-Qaeda. For example, one 1998 State Department cable claimed that: “Taliban Leader Mullah Omar lashed out at the U.S., asserting that the Taliban will continue providing a safe haven for Bin Laden.”²¹

There is plenty of evidence that Pakistan’s ISI actively funds the Taliban and other terrorist cells as well, while barring the U.S. military from operating in tribal areas. A 2010 BBC article stated that the ISI was giving “funding, training and sanctuary to the Afghan Taliban on a scale much larger than previously thought,” going as far as to say that support for the Taliban was “official ISI policy.” Since 9/11, the United States has given Pakistan over $15 billion, much of which goes to the ISI and military.²²

Current Vice President Joe Biden said himself in 2003 that the ISI was either turning a blind eye or cooperating with the Taliban. In addition, some members of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee “contend that the intelligence service may have provided money, weapons and broadcast equipment to Taliban fighters now in Pakistan to transmit anti-Karzai, anti-American messages into Afghanistan.”²³ BBC has reported on a secret NATO document which notes: “Pakistan’s manipulation of the Taliban senior leadership continues unabated.”²⁴

A report published by the London School of Economics gave nine in depth interviews with Taliban insurgent commanders. They suggest that the ISI has members on the Taliban leadership council, though they expressed fear of assassination if they went into to much depth on this topic.²⁵

It’s not hard to establish that the United States has allied itself with one of the biggest funders of terrorism in the Middle East, a fact which blatantly clashes with the official narrative of Western involvement in the region. It makes much more sense when understood in the context that the goal of the United States in the Middle East is not the prevention of terrorism, but rather for political, military and economic hegemony.

21 Diplomatic cable available here.

22 BBC, “Pakistani agents ‘funding and training Afghan Taliban’,” June 13, 2010

23 New York Times, “Threats and Responses: Afghanistan,” February 13, 2002

24 BBC, “Pakistan Helping Afghan Taliban – NATO,” February 1, 2012

25 London School of Economics report available here.

* * * *

Osama Runs Wild

“I do not profess a broad expertise in international affairs, but between January 1996 and June 1999 I was in charge of running operations against Al-Qaeda from Washington. When it comes to this small slice of the large U.S. national security pie, I speak with firsthand experience (and for several score of CIA officers) when I state categorically that during this time senior White House officials repeatedly refused to act on sound intelligence that provided multiple chances to eliminate Osama bin Laden – either by capture or by U.S. military attack. I witnessed and documented, along with dozens of other CIA officers, instances where life-risking intelligence-gathering work of the agency’s men and women in the field was wasted.” – Michael Scheuer, 22 year veteran of the CIA²⁶

A 2001 Washington Post article states that in 1996 the government of Sudan offered to keep tabs on Osama, or if that did not suffice, arrest him and hand him over to either the United States or Saudi custody.²⁷

“The Sudanese security services, he said, would happily keep close watch on bin Laden for the United States. But if that would not suffice, the government was prepared to place him in custody and hand him over, though to whom was ambiguous. In one formulation, Erwa said Sudan would consider any legitimate proffer of criminal charges against the accused terrorist.” Their negotiations concluded as such: “We said he will go to Afghanistan, and they [U.S. officials] said, ‘Let him.'”

The Clinton administration claimed that they lacked criminal charges to pin on Bin Laden, though this explanation is a farce, as less than a year previous to that they had named him as a co-conspirator in the World Trade Center bombing, among other terrorist activities.²⁸

Just a year later, the Clinton administration would commit the egregious war crime of the bombing of the Sudanese Al-Shifa pharmaceutical factory, which provided 50% of the medicine for Sudan.²⁹The destruction of the factory was estimated to be responsible for the deaths of “several tens of thousands” of people according to the German ambassador to Sudan, on a much flimsier pretext.³⁰Interestingly, the pretext of the Al-Shifa bombing is that the factory had ties to Bin Laden, in the very country that had proposed to extradite him, by the very people who declined to accept his arrest.

A 2002 article in The Guardian reveals that the first INTERPOL arrest warrant for Bin Laden came from Libya’s Muammar Gaddafi in 1998.³¹ It also uncovered that the MI6 paid large sums of money to an Al-Qaeda cell in Libya in a failed attempt to assassinate Gaddafi. Perhaps this is why U.S. and U.K. intelligence agencies apparently buried the fact that Libya had issued the warrant for Bin Laden’s arrest and downplayed the threat he posed. Five months after the arrest warrant was issued, Al-Qaeda killed over 200 people in bombings of U.S. embassies in Kenya and Tanzania.³²

These actions are consistent with the trend of working with Al-Qaeda when they shared the same goals, and fighting them when war in the region was a strategic geopolitical move.

26 Los Angeles Times, “Why I Resigned From the CIA,” December 5, 2004

27 Washington Post, “U.S. Was Foiled Multiple Times in Efforts To Capture Bin Laden or Have Him Killed”, October 3, 2001

28 PBS Frontline, “Timeline: Al Qaeda’s Global Context.”

29 The Nation, “Reply to Hitchens,” October 1, 2001

30 Wikipedia article on the Al-Shifa Pharmaceutical Company

31 The Guardian, “MI6 ‘Halted Bid to Arrest Bin Laden‘”, November 10, 2001

32 Al-Jazeera, “US embassy attacks anniversary marked,” August 7, 2013

* * * *

US Trained Terrorists

It has been widely reported, thanks to revelations by ABC reporter John Cooley, that some Islamic fundamentalists were trained in the United States in the 1980’s, by way of Camp Peary, the CIA spy base in Virginia, being flown in from places such as Jordan, Egypt and even Africa.³³ It raises the question of how many such camps existed beyond the United States. Regardless, there have been some astonishing revelations of terrorists trained within the US borders.

One specifically alarming case is that of Egyptian Ali Muhammed. He was a part of the fundamentalist military unit that assassinated Egyptian President Anwar Sadat in 1981. In 1984, he was hired by the CIA, though they claim that the relationship was short-lived.³⁴ He would soon join the military and become a member of the Green Berets, and serve as a drill sergeant at Fort Bragg while providing clandestine training to jihadists such as Mahmud Abaouhalima, convicted perpetrator of the 1993 World Trade Center bombings.³⁵

He would take a short leave from his military duties and travel to Afghanistan in 1988 to assist the Mujahideen, returning just months later.³⁶ Such an act is completely unheard of, entirely unprecedented and raises all sorts of red flags. Who was allowing Muhammed to circumvent the law and what type of special privileges and protections was he receiving?

In the early 1990’s, he would return to Afghanistan and began training jihadists with the skills he had learned at Fort Bragg. According to former FBI special agent Jack Cloonan in an interview with PBS, Muhammed’s first training session included Osama bin Laden, as well as Ayman al-Zawahiri, the current leader of Al-Qaeda.³⁷

Former Directors of Counter-terrorism at the National Security Council have alleged that Muhammed took maps and training materials from Fort Bragg and used them to write the Al-Qaeda terrorist training manual.³⁸

Muhammed’s superior at Fort Bragg, Lt. Col. Robert Anderson, has stated: “I think you or I would have a better chance of winning the Powerball lottery, than an Egyptian major in the unit that assassinated Sadat would have getting a visa, getting to California, getting into the Army and getting assigned to a Special Forces unit. That just doesn’t happen.”³⁹

Elsewhere he stated: “It was unthinkable that an ordinary American GI would go unpunished after fighting in a foreign war,” and that he assumed that Muhammed was sponsored by the CIA.⁴⁰

In the year 2000, Muhammed plead guilty to involvement in the 1998 embassy bombings that killed 224 people including 12 Americans.⁴¹ He admitted during the trial that he was a part of a broader plot to attack any Western target in the Middle East, as well as admitting that he helped transfer Osama bin Laden from Pakistan to Sudan.

33 The Guardian, “Blowback Chronicles”, September 15, 2001

34 New York Times, “The Plot Against America,” August 6, 2006

35 Wikipedia article on Mahmud Abouhalima

36 San Francisco Chronicle, “Al Qaeda terrorist worked with FBI / Ex-Silicon Valley resident plotted embassy attacks,” November 4, 2001

37 PBS Frontline Interview with Jack Cloonan, available here.

38 Daniel Benjamin and Steve Simon, “Age of Sacred Terror.”

39 Article written by five time Emmy Award recipient Peter Lance, hosted at BoilingFrogsPost.com, available here.

40 San Francisco Chronicle, “Al Qaeda terrorist worked with FBI / Ex-Silicon Valley resident plotted embassy attacks,” November 4, 2001

41 BBC, “Ex US Soldier Admits to Embassy Bombings,” October 20, 2000

* * * *

United States and Al-Qaeda Have The Same Agenda

In 2011, NATO, led by Barack Obama and the United States, initiated military action against Libya by enforcing a No Fly Zone. They carried out numerous air strikes, including one against Libyan state TV which killed 3 journalists.⁴² Downplayed in Western media was the fact that the ‘rebels’ consisted of various factions of radical Islamists, many who had been fighting Gaddafi for decades and had their roots in the Mujahideen in Afghanistan, such as the Libyan Islamic Fighting Group, whose goal is to implement an Islamic state.⁴³

CNN has reported on widespread abuses against civilians from these groups after Gaddafi was ousted from power, including the use of landmines and other deadly equipment.⁴⁴ Many of the rebels have admitted links to Al-Qaeda⁴⁵, whom had declared support for the rebels in Libya.⁴⁶

The Washington Post has reported that a former Al-Qaeda member has estimated there to be 1,000 ‘freelance jihadists’ that have traveled to Libya to support the rebels, many affiliated with Al-Qaeda, and also that Libya has one of the highest domestic Al-Qaeda populations in the Middle East, quoting a 2007 West Point study on the subject.⁴⁷

In 1999, the United States decided to support the Kosovo Liberation Army (KLA), allies of Al-Qaeda. Bill Clinton framed the intervention in humanitarian terms despite the fact that staggering atrocities were being committed on both sides.⁴⁸ French News Agency AFPreported that members of the KLA had been trained by Bin Laden,⁴⁹ and the Washington Times reported that the KLA bankrolled their operations with funds from the heroin trade in Afghanistan and had accepted money from Bin Laden himself.⁵⁰

The Mujahideen, many specifically members of Al-Qaeda, were also instrumental in Bosnia during the NATO intervention in 1993. Their presence is still a factor of instability today.⁵¹ It is of significance that all of these associations occurred after the 1993 World Trade Center bombing, when Al-Qaeda first became widespread in the American lexicon.

Barack Obama has been arming rebels in Syria, beginning secretly with CIA arms airlifts in 2012,⁵²citing many of the same reasons for intervention that Clinton did in 1999, despite domestic and foreign ally opposition.^{53 54} Once again, many of the rebels have been associated with Al-Qaeda and labeled terrorist organizations by the US.⁵⁵

42 The Guardian, “NATO Bombs Libya TV Transmitters,” July 30, 2011.

43 International Business Times, “Does the Transitional Council Really Represent Libyan Democracy and Opposition to Gaddafi?”, July 20, 2001.

44 CNN, “Rights group: Libyan rebels looted and beat civilians,” July 15, 2011

45 The Telegraph, “Libyan rebel commander admits his fighters have al-Qaeda links,” March 25, 2011

46 The Telegraph, “Libya: The West and Al-Qaeda on the Same Side,” March 18, 2011

47 Washington Times, “’Freelance Jihadists’ Join Libyan Rebels,” March 29, 2011

48 Wikipedia article on the various war crimes committed during the Kosovo War

49 AFP, “Members of Kosovo Liberation Trained by Bin Laden,” May 4, 1999.

50 Washington Times, “KLA Finances War with Heroin Sales,” May 3, 1999

51 Radio Free Europe, “Bosnia-Herzegovina: New Book Investigates Presence Of Al-Qaeda,” June 1, 2007

52 New York Times, “Arms Airlift to Syria Rebels Expands, With Aid From C.I.A.,” March 24, 2013

53 Fox News, “Lawmakers try to stall arming of Syrian opposition, as CIA presses ahead,” June 27, 2013

54 Fox News, “Merkel tells Parliament that risks of arming Syrian rebels ‘incalculable‘,” June 27, 2013

55 USA Today, “Syrian rebels pledge loyalty to al-Qaeda”, June 14, 2013

* * * *

The Source of Radicalism

Earlier I mentioned CIA-funded madrassas being a source of Islamic radicalism in the 1980’s. They have been an important factor in the radicalization of Islam ever since. As of 2008, there are some 750 madrassas in Pakistan that teach jihad and radicalism, about 10% of all madrassas in the country (and I want to emphasize that this section is referring to specific radical iterations of Madrassas, not simply applying a blanket generalization to the religious style of education).⁵⁶ U.S. diplomatic cables released by Wikileaks revealed that the funding for these radical schools now comes from Saudi Arabia, the United States’ biggest ally in the region.⁵⁷

The radical madrassa network exploits impoverished areas by recruiting children for what essentially amounts to indoctrination camps. In exchange, families receive upwards of $6,500 per son for their ‘sacrifice to Islam’, and during schooling, contact with families is forbidden. After graduation, many are funneled into terrorist training camps in the Federally Administered Tribal Areas, the cables stated.

PBS Frontline did a story on a 16 year old who was recruited to a Pakistan Wahabi Islam madrassa from an impoverished area in East Africa.⁵⁸ A few years later, he was instrumental in a terror plot, blowing up the US Embassy in Nairobi, Kenya. The PBS website hosts a letter he wrote to his brother, in which he says he spent two years on a military base learning warfare, including the usage of Israeli arms.⁵⁹

Is the CIA still involved? The House of Saud has given at least $1.474 billion dollars to the Bush family,⁶⁰ and the United States sold Saudi Arabia $60 billion worth of arms in 2010, the biggest arms sale in American history.⁶¹ Before he was president, George H.W. Bush was the Director of the CIA. As recently as June 25th, 2013, Secretary of State John Kerry announced that Saudi Arabia is ‘one of our closest partners’.⁶² At the very least we can establish complicity.

Regardless, the United States’ relationship with Saudi Arabia ought to raise a lot of important questions. On November 4, 2013, Secretary of State John Kerry hailed Saudi Arabia as a very important ally to the United States.⁶³ How can we reconcile this stance with the 2010 cable leaks revealing that former Secretary of State Hilary Clinton said that donors in the kingdom “constitute the most significant source of funding to Sunni terrorist groups worldwide,” and that “it has been an ongoing challenge to persuade Saudi officials to treat terrorist financing emanating from Saudi Arabia as a strategic priority”?⁶⁴

It is clear that the United States views their geopolitical relationship with Saudi Arabia to be much more important than combating terrorism, despite U.S. involvement in the Middle East being saturated with rhetoric about the War on Terror. The same statement can be applied to the relationship with Pakistan, which is instrumental in the operations of the Taliban.

56 Naval Postgraduate Thesis, by Paul Bell, titled “Pakistan’s Madrassas: Weapons of Mass Instruction?”Available here. (PDF Warning)

57 Full Wikileaks Cables available here.

58 PBS Frontline recap available here.

59 PBS, letter available here.

60 Salon, “Did the Saudi’s Buy a President?” March 12, 2004

61 Wikipedia article on Saudi-US Relations

62 John Kerry transcripts from the US Department of State website, available here.

63 The Guardian, “Kerry hails disgruntled Saudi Arabia as ‘the senior player’ in Middle East,” November 4, 2013

64 The Independent, “Saudi Arabia is ‘Biggest Funder’ of Terrorists,” December 6, 2010

* * * *

Double Agents

The assassination of high-profile Pakistan tribal leader Qari Zainuddin was widely reported in the Western media.⁶⁵ Only days before his assassination he had renounced his support of the Taliban, claiming that their actions were un-Islamic. What the Western media neglected to report, but was widely reported in Pakistan and other countries, was that Zainuddin had previously claimed that Baitullah Mehsud, the man who ended up ordering his assassination, was an American agent.⁶⁶

The claim that American agents operate in the Taliban sounds far-fetched but there have been some eye-opening reports that confirm the possibility. For example, a 2004 article in the UK publication Times Online reported that a high ranking Al-Qaeda member had been revealed to be a double agent working for MI5.

“Abu Qatada boasted to MI5 that he could prevent terrorist attacks and offered to expose dangerous extremists, while all along he was setting up a haven for his terror organisation in Britain.”⁶⁷

Abu Qatada has been imprisoned multiple times in Britain but has not been charged with any crimes. During his career he has issued fatwahs justifying the killing of converts from Islam, advocated the killing of Jews, praised attacks on America, and was convicted on charges of terrorism in Jordan, all while working in association with MI5.⁶⁸

A 2002 article published by French news organization AFP states that Palestine security forces had arrested a group of Palestinians who had confessed to collaborating with Israel and posing as operatives of Al-Qaeda.⁶⁹

“He [Palestinian Authority Official] said the alleged collaborators sought to “discredit the Palestinian people, justify every Israeli crime and provide reasons to carry out a new (military) aggression in the Gaza Strip.”

The arrest came just two days after Ariel Sharon claimed that Al-Qaeda militants were operating in Gaza and Lebanon, likely in an attempt to justify future military action. BBC has also reported on this story.⁷⁰

65 BBC, “Tribal Leader Killed in Afghanistan,” June 23, 2009

66 PakTribune, “Why Does Zainuddin Want To Kill Baitullah?”

67 Times of London, “Al Qaeda Cleric Exposed as an MI5 Double Agent,” March 25, 2004. Article is behind a pay wall, link is to a re-hosting at Whale.to.

68 BBC, “Abu Qattadah Timeline,” May 10, 2013

69 AFP, “Palestinians Arrest al-Qaeda ‘poseurs’,” December 8, 2002

70 BBC, “Israel ‘Faked’ Al Qaeda Presence,” December 8, 2002

* * * *

“The Official Story”

The official story is that Bin Laden and Al-Qaeda found new enemies in the U.S. after the Cold War when the United States began occupying military bases in Saudi Arabia. It sounds plausible, but does not stand up to deeper scrutiny.

In 1993, Scott Armstrong, at the time the top investigative reporter for the Washington Post, gave some tremendously revealing interviews with PBS Frontline. In an episode titled “The Arming of Saudi Arabia”, he stated that the United States and Saudi Arabia had jointly conspired to covertly build $200 billion worth of military installations between the years 1979 and 1992.⁷¹ Steve Coll, eminent Bin Laden biographer, states that the Binladen group received a multitude of these contracts, with the knowing intent to support and house US military personnel during wars that may threaten Saudi territory.⁷²

This occurred during the same time that Osama bin Laden was actively using Binladen Group assets to build extensive infrastructure in Afghanistan. Surely he was aware of the construction of the military bases and who intended to occupy them, yet he did not have a problem with the prospect then.

71 PBS Frontline transcript of the episode available here.

72 Steven Coll’, “The Bin Ladens.”

* * * *

Money

During the peak of World War II, military and defense spending reached a rate of over 40% of the United States Gross Domestic Product.⁷³ Even after a massive demobilization, the military-industrial complex had grown to a behemoth, averaging over 7% of GDP throughout the Cold War. According to the Cato Institute, the United States spent a total of $6 trillion on military and intelligence in just four decades during the Cold War, a staggering sum.

After the Soviet Union was defeated, the Military Industrial Complex experienced a steady decline, accounting for just 3.7% of GDP in the year 2000. This changed on 9/11, when the MIC [Military-Industrial Complex] found that they could turn their old friends into new enemies to fight, and their percentage of GDP has more than doubled in the last decade.⁷⁴

Congress has officially authorized more than $1.3 trillion to fight the war on terror, and a Brown University study says this is just the tip of the iceberg: Even if the War on Terror were to begin de-escalating now, it would end up costing a total of $3.9 trillion between domestic spending, veterans costs, and interest.⁷⁵ The money comes from the taxpayers of the United States, whether directly or indirectly, and goes into the deep pockets of defense contractors and banks.

73 Math and Charts available here at USGovernmentSpending.com.

74 More Charts.

75 Brown.edu “Cost of War Project”, available here.

* * * *

Al-Qaeda Today

In 2003, Donald Rumsfeld wrote a memo to the Joint Chiefs of Staff where he stated that “We need to stop populating Guantanamo Bay with low-level enemy combatants.”⁷⁶ The memo was uncovered in 2011. Over 750 prisoners have gone through Guantanamo, most being released without charges.⁷⁷ Of the roughly 160 prisoners in Guantanamo Bay today, half have been cleared for release but are still being detained.⁷⁸ Former CIA Director Leon Panetta said in 2010 that there were less than 100 Al-Qaeda in Afghanistan.⁷⁹

76 Washington Post, “Rumsfeld complained of ‘low level’ GTMO prisoners, memo reveals,” March 3, 2011

77 Wikipedia article “List of Guantanamo Detainees.”

78 RussiaToday, “‘Political football’: Gitmo detainees ‘abandoned’ by US government,” May 16, 2013

79 ABC (Australia) “Fewer than 100 Al Qaeda in Afghanistan: CIA chief,” June 28, 2010

* * * *

Conclusion

After trillions of dollars spent, hundreds of thousands of deaths, repeated domestic rights infringements, we are left with only a handful of proven Al-Qaeda members, with a majority of prisoners simply being held without charges.

Al-Qaeda, the organization purported to be a sprawling monster after the September 11th attacks, has been revealed to be a shell of an operation, financed by wealthy US allies. The result is endless war: Politicians, military and media shine the light just right to make the shadow of the mouse look huge and monstrous to justify endless profits. The media is not even connecting the most basic of dots to reveal the tremendous deception.

The evidence is a repeated policy of the destabilization of Central Asia and the development of Islamic radicals that spans decades. The result is a new global enemy without borders or diplomatic representation that can be fought indefinitely. Unless significant changes are made, we are looking at a future with an endless war on ‘terrorism’ where more terrorists are created daily by the very policies that are meant to be fighting them, and a foreign policy dictated by the whims of war profiteering.

And what kind of influence are we having in the Middle East? The rhetoric of ‘bringing democracy to the peoples of Iraq and Afghanistan’ would be laughable were it not such a grandiose and destructive lie. The impact of American intervention in these two countries has been disastrous.

“The biggest source of corruption in Afghanistan,” one American official said, “was the United States.” – New York Times⁸⁰

This New York Times article describes how the CIA routinely funneled millions of dollars without oversight in unmarked bags to the offices of President Hamid Karzai, while simultaneously denouncing the Iranian policy of doing the exact same thing. U.S. officials are quoted as saying that instead of buying the loyalty of the Afghan President, the payments instead proliferated into a vast web of corruption while Karzai became increasingly defiant of U.S. interests.

In Iraq, the country has devolved into near anarchy with monthly death tolls from terrorism sometimes reaching the thousands. In 2004, the New York Times reported that there was a massive assassination campaign targeting intellectuals and professionals, with between 500 and 1,000 urban professionals killed in just a nine-month span.⁸¹ From drive by shootings to stealth murders in the victims home, officials in Iraq agree that there is a massive campaign to silence the capable and educated.

“’They are going after our brains,’ said Lt. Col. Jabbar Abu Natiha, head of the organized crime unit of the Baghdad police. ‘It is a big operation. Maybe even a movement.’ These white-collar killings, American and Iraqi officials say, are separate from – and in some ways more insidious than – the settling of scores with former Baath Party officials, or the singling-out of police officers and others thought to be collaborating with the occupation. Hundreds of them have been attacked as well in an effort to sow insecurity and chaos. But by silencing urban professionals, said Brig. Gen. Mark Kimmitt, a spokesman for the occupation forces, the guerrillas are waging war on Iraq’s fledgling institutions and progress itself. The dead include doctors, lawyers and judges.”

In other words, Iraq is being left without the very people who could have been future leaders of democracy, and whom could have established a functioning society. And note that shortly after the George W. Bush invaded Iraq, a corporate friendly government was established.

Furthermore, it is not empty rhetoric to say that the Iraq invasion was based on lies. In 2012, the Iraqi defector responsible for the ‘evidence’ of chemical weapon production in Iraq which was presented to the United Nations by Colin Powell, who portrayed his evidence as “facts and conclusions based on solid intelligence”, confessed to BBC that his claims were entirely fabricated.⁸² Clearly there is an agenda that does not mesh with the rhetoric!

Will the War on Terror ever end? Who truly has the incentive to scale back the operation? Not clandestine agencies or the military, who are seeing their budgets increase year by year. Certainly not any of the major influences in politics, banks and corporations, who are seeing massive profits from government contracts and resource exploitation. And most certainly not the politicians in Washington, who virtually rely on the lobbying of these organizations to keep their jobs.

Journalist Glenn Greenwald put it succinctly:

“But what one can say for certain is that there is zero reason for US officials to want an end to the war on terror, and numerous and significant reasons why they would want it to continue. It’s always been the case that the power of political officials is at its greatest, its most unrestrained, in a state of war. Cicero, two thousand years ago, warned that “In times of war, the law falls silent”. John Jay, in Federalist No. 4, warned that as a result of that truth, “nations in general will make war whenever they have a prospect of getting anything by it … for the purposes and objects merely personal, such as thirst for military glory, revenge for personal affronts, ambition, or private compacts to aggrandize or support their particular families or partisans.” If you were a US leader, or an official of the National Security State, or a beneficiary of the private military and surveillance industries, why would you possibly want the war on terror to end? That would be the worst thing that could happen. It’s that war that generates limitless power, impenetrable secrecy, an unquestioning citizenry, and massive profit.” – Glenn Greenwald, writing for The Guardian⁸³

Greenwald also notes the hopelessness of combating terrorism with further violence.

“Indeed, virtually every person accused of plotting to target the US with terrorist attacks in last several years has expressly cited increasing US violence, aggression and militarism in the Muslim world as the cause. There’s no question that this ‘war’ will continue indefinitely. There is no question that US actions are the cause of that, the gasoline that fuels the fire.”

But the notion that the US government is even entertaining putting an end to any of this is a pipe dream, and the belief that they even want to is fantasy. They’re preparing for more endless war; their actions are fueling that war; and they continue to reap untold benefits from its continuation. Only outside compulsion, from citizens, can make an end to all of this possible.”

80 New York Times, “With Bags of Cash, C.I.A. Seeks Influence in Afghanistan,” April 28, 2013. One particularly salient quote from the article is worth sharing: “No one mentions the agency’s money at cabinet meetings. It is handled by a small clique at the National Security Council, including its administrative chief, Mohammed Zia Salehi, Afghan officials said. Mr. Salehi, though, is better known for being arrested in 2010 in connection with a sprawling, American-led investigation that tied together Afghan cash smuggling, Taliban finances and the opium trade. Mr. Karzai had him released within hours, and the C.I.A. then helped persuade the Obama administration to back off its anticorruption push, American officials said.”

81 New York Times, “THE STRUGGLE FOR IRAQ: KILLINGS; Assassinations Tear Into Iraq’s Educated Class,” February 7, 2004.

82 The Independent, “Man whose WMD lies led to 100,000 deaths confesses all,” April 1, 2012

83 The Guardian, “The ‘war on terror’ – by design – can never end,” January 4, 2013

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. How close of a relationship did the CIA maintain with Osama bin Laden after Operation Cyclone?

2. Why does the United States consider Pakistan and Saudi Arabia, the two largest funders of terrorism, our biggest allies in the region?

3. How closely does the CIA work with the intelligence agencies of these countries?

4. How many agents does the United States have operating in Al-Qaeda and the Taliban, and how many atrocities are they responsible for?

5. Why have Al-Qaeda and the United States fought on the same side of multiple wars?

6. Why have so few Al-Qaeda been apprehended after over a decade of fighting the War on Terror and millions of dollars spent?

7. Who has a monetary stake in the proliferation of terrorism, and how much influence do they hold in official U.S. Policy?

Note: Feeling overwhelmed with this material? Take an inspiration break in our Inspiration Center.

* * * *

Chapter II: The One-Party State

Perhaps the most widely proliferated truism of American patriotism is that the the two-party system is a beacon of democracy. Surely, our system is better than that of Iran, where presidential candidates must be approved by a religious council, or perhaps that of Venezuela, where the majority of the media is state-owned and disseminates propaganda in each election.

Democrats and Republicans are widely different, it seems. At least that is what their hyper-partisan bickering would imply. Bill Clinton and Barack Obama must be unabashed liberals, otherwise why would the Republicans despise them so much? The divide between party faithfuls of different colors runs deep, with each side blaming the entirety of the country’s problems on the other, often resulting in a state of pure hatred and disgust among citizens. One only needs to turn on cable news to see this as a fact.

However, the reality is that Republican and Democrat presidents have closely followed a similar agenda for half a century. The idea that American governance alternates as a sort of give-and-take between liberalism and conservatism is little more than a fantasy. I do not discount that there may be serious and significant differences between Democrat and Republican individuals, many of them members of Congress, and certainly in state legislatures. Yet at the top of the pyramid, where the power to set agendas resides, there is only the Agenda, and the primary difference between the two parties is the speed at which ‘the Agenda’ is advanced.

It is fascinating how Bill Clinton began his presidential campaign with playing a Saxophone on live television, talking about his foray into marijuana, reminiscing about his protest of the Vietnam war, and ended up with perhaps the most conservative administration of any president in modern history. Later, Obama entered the stage as a candidate of change, only to accelerate and consolidate the hegemony of the political elite faster than any predecessor. But lets go beyond rhetoric and examine the records of the last five Presidents, and see exactly how similar their platforms were.

* * * *

Crime

“The United States has less than 5 percent of the world’s population. But it has almost a quarter of the world’s prisoners. Indeed, the United States leads the world in producing prisoners, a reflection of a relatively recent and now entirely distinctive American approach to crime and punishment. Americans are locked up for crimes — from writing bad checks to using drugs — that would rarely produce prison sentences in other countries. And in particular they are kept incarcerated far longer than prisoners in other nations.” – New York Times⁸⁴

At the end of Reagan’s administration, the incarceration rate was 247 per 100,000 citizens. The demand for prison space had been steadily increasing since the War on Drugs began. Under George H.W. Bush the incarceration rate had increased to 332 per 100,000. It is a common misconception that it is Republicans have the more punitive crime policies.

Under Clinton, the incarceration rate skyrocketed to 476 per 100,000.⁸⁵ The Clinton administration gave 30 billion dollars to states to fund and expand their prisons,⁸⁶ and championed the Violent Crime Control and Law Enforcement Act that added 100,000 new police officers.⁸⁷ The bill was written by current Vice President Joe Biden. The act also expanded the death penalty to be applicable to 60 more offenses, including drug trafficking, and eliminated funding for inmate education.

Private prisons flourished under Bill Clinton. The ACLU in 2011 published a fascinating review of the private prison system and found that since 1990, the private prison population has increased by 1600%.⁸⁸ The number of private prison systems actually peaked in the year 2000 with 153 facilities.⁸⁹

The policy that began under Reagan and has been flourishing through both Bushes, Clinton and Obama can only be referred to as ‘mass incarceration’. As of 2013, the United States holds more prisoners than any other country in the world, including China, as well as a larger percentage of prisoners per population than any other country. For an even more sobering comparison, consider that the United States has more people imprisoned today, as a whole and per capita, than Stalin had under his archipelago of gulags.⁹⁰

Louisiana is perhaps the best example of how corrupted the prison system can become when privatization runs amok. Louisiana has a largely private prison system, and currently has 1 in 86 adults incarcerated, twice the national average and three times that of Iran. Nearly two-thirds of these prisoners are serving time for non-violent offenses.⁹¹

Lobbying, along with an incentive of job creation, has resulted in some of the toughest penalties in the country, such as a potential 10 years in prison for writing a bad check. Over half of the prison population returns to the system in five years, without having received any rehabilitation, and being returned to communities devastated largely in part by the continued extraction of the population into prison for non-violent offenses.

84 New York Times, “U.S. prison population dwarfs that of other nations,” April 23, 2008

85 USA Today, “Study: Prisons Filled At Record Pace in Clinton Years,” February 18, 2001

86 Ibid.

87 Wikipedia article on the Violent Crime and Law Enforcement Act

88 (PDF Warning) ACLU.org report titled “Banking on Bondage”

89 Wikipedia article on the Private Prison System

90 New Yorker, “The Caging of America,” January 30, 2012

91 New York Times, “Plantations, Prisons and Profits,” March 25, 2012

* * * *

Arms Sales

On the campaign trail, Bill Clinton made this promise: “I expect to review our arms sales policy and to take it up with the other major arms sellers of the world as a part of a long-term effort to reduce the proliferation of weapons.”⁹² And then, in some astounding turn of events (or predictable, for those who have been watching closely), United States arms sales doubled in Clinton’s first year in office alone.⁹³

In 2006, the United Nations convened in order to create a “comprehensive, legally binding instrument establishing common international standards for the import, export and transfer of conventional arms.” The United States was the only country to vote against the measure.⁹⁴ In 2008, Obama signaled that he would change the course from the Bush administration and take steps to limit arms sales internationally. And similar to nearly 2 decades earlier, United States arms sales tripled in 2011.⁹⁵ By 2012, Obama had ended negotiations on the U.N. treaty.⁹⁶Is it any surprise, considering Obama received more campaign donations from the Defense Industry than McCain?⁹⁷

One particularly shocking revelation was a program known as ‘Fast and Furious’, where Barack Obama oversaw the initiation and operation of a gun running scheme where arms were sent over the Mexican border and directly into the hands of criminals.⁹⁸

“Fast and Furious was an operation so cloak-and-dagger Mexican authorities weren’t even notified that thousands of semi-automatic firearms were being sold to people in Arizona thought to have links to Mexican drug cartels. According to ATF whistleblowers, in 2009 the U.S. government began instructing gun store owners to break the law by selling firearms to suspected criminals. ATF agents then, again according to testimony by ATF agents turned whistleblowers, were ordered not to intercept the smugglers but rather to let the guns “walk” across the U.S.-Mexican border and into the hands of Mexican drug-trafficking organizations.” – Forbes

Senior ATF Agent John Dodson, who broke the Fast and Furious story, was alarmed when he noted that the crime rates and violence in Mexico and at the border increased significantly after he began allowing, under order, massive amounts of guns to cross the border into the hands of criminals and cartels.

“Dodson said they never did take down a drug cartel. However, he said thousands of Fast and Furious weapons are still out there and will be claiming victims on both sides of the border for years to come.” – CBS⁹⁹

On December 14, 2010, Border Patrol Agent Brian Terry was killed on duty, with a gun given to criminals by the ATF.¹⁰⁰

92 Mother Jones, “Arms Around the World,” August 1999

93 Alternet.org “Hightower: Clinton’s Foreign Jobs Program,” April 25, 2000

94 Wikipedia article on the Arms Trade Treaty

95 Mother Jones, “CHARTS: US Overseas Arms Sales More Than Tripled in 2011,” August 29, 2012

96 Mother Jones, “Obama Administration Ducks for Cover on UN Arms Trade Treaty,” July 31, 2012

97 Time, “Obama Beats McCain in Defense Contributions,” October 31, 2008

98 Forbes, “’Fast And Furious’ Just Might Be President Obama’s Watergate,” September 28, 2011

99 CBS, “Agent: I was ordered to let U.S. guns into Mexico,” March 3, 2011

100 Los Angeles Times, “ATF sought to downplay guns scandal, emails show,” July 21, 2011

* * * *

Domestic Spying

A 1999 BBC article titled “Echelon Spy Network Revealed” began with the paragraph: “Imagine a global spying network that can eavesdrop on every single phone call, fax or e-mail, anywhere on the planet. It sounds like science fiction, but it’s true.” The network, known as Echelon, traces its roots all the way back to the John F. Kennedy presidency, and had been expanding ever since.¹⁰¹ In 1992, the Director of the NSA described the goal of the program in simple terms: ‘Global Access’.¹⁰²The agenda for mass surveillance was institutionalized long before most Americans recognize.

Then there was George Bush’s illegal warrantless wiretapping. Began in 2001, the program allowed the NSA to monitor communications between United States citizens and those abroad without appropriate checks and balances.¹⁰³ Interestingly, the groundwork for warrantless wiretapping had actually been laid out by Bill Clinton.¹⁰⁴ During his presidency, he slowly expanded the reach of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) and the capability of the NSA to classify and withhold information about their activities. When the revelations about the program were made in 2006, they were controversial, but Congress repeatedly renewed the NSA’s license without much of an uproar from the public.

By the 2008 election, citizens were growing weary of the spying program and Barack Obama capitalized on this sentiment. He vowed to end warrantless wiretapping and during his primary campaign he went as far as to say he would filibuster the extension of the FISA legislation, responsible for allowing the expanded spying capabilities.¹⁰⁵

“When I’m president, one of the first things I’m going to do is call in my attorney general and say to him or her, I want you to review every executive order that was issued by George Bush, whether it relates to warrantless wiretaps or detaining people or reading e- mails, or whatever it is. I want you to go through every single one of them and if they are unconstitutional, if they’re encroaching on civil liberties unnecessarily, we are going to overturn them. We’re going to change them.” – Barack Obama, 2007¹⁰⁶

He first broke this promise after winning the primary campaign, in July 2008, when he was one of 68 Senators who voted to renew the NSA capabilities.¹⁰⁷ Less than a year later, Barack Obama would vastly broaden the legal argument the Executive branch used to justify the spying, and exempted the Government from the possibility of being sued thanks to a liberal interpretation of a clause in the Patriot Act.¹⁰⁸

“In other words, beyond even the outrageously broad ‘state secrets’ privilege invented by the Bush administration and now embraced fully by the Obama administration, the Obama DOJ has now invented a brand new claim of government immunity, one which literally asserts that the U.S. Government is free to intercept all of your communications (calls, emails and the like) and – even if what they’re doing is blatantly illegal and they know it’s illegal – you are barred from suing them unless they ‘willfully disclose’ to the public what they have learned,” – Glenn Greenwald

On June 6th 2013, it was revealed that Barack Obama oversaw the largest infringement of the Fourth Amendment in the history of the United States with the construction of a veritable surveillance state, capable of tracking the movements and communications of every American citizen. We now know that the NSA and United Kingdom counterpart GHCQ:

• Collect the domestic meta-data of both parties in a phone-call.¹⁰⁹

• Set up fake internet cafes to steal data.¹¹⁰

• Has intercepted the phone calls of at least 35 world leaders, including allies such as German Chancellor Angela Merkel.¹¹¹

• Can tap into the underwater fiber-optic cables that carry a majority of the world’s internet traffic.¹¹²

• Tracks communications within media institutions such as Al Jazeera.¹¹³

• Has ‘bugged’ the United Nations headquarters.¹¹⁴

• Has set up a financial database to track international banking and credit card transactions.¹¹⁵

• Collects and stores over 200 million domestic and foreign text messages each day.¹¹⁶

• Collects and has real-time access to browsing history, email, and social media activity. To gain access, an analyst simply needs to fill out an on-screen form with a broad justification for the search that is not reviewed by any court or NSA personnel.¹¹⁷

“I, sitting at my desk, could wiretap anyone, from you or your accountant, to a federal judge or even the president, if I had a personal email”. – Edward Snowden

• Creates maps of the social networks of United States citizens.¹¹⁸

• Has access to smartphone app data.¹¹⁹

• Uses spies in embassies to collect data, often by setting up ‘listening stations’ on the roofs of buildings.¹²⁰

• Uses fake LinkedIn profiles and other doctored web pages to secretly install surveillance software in unwitting companies and individuals.¹²¹

• Tracks reservations at upscale hotels.¹²²

• Has intercepted the talking-points of world leaders before meetings with Barack Obama.¹²³

• Can crack encryption codes on cellphones.¹²⁴

• Has implanted software on over 100,000 computers worldwide allowing them to hack data without internet connection, using radio waves.¹²⁵

• Has access to computers through fake wireless connections.¹²⁶

• Monitors communications in online games such as World of Warcraft.¹²⁷

• Intercepts shipping deliveries and install back-door devices allowing access.¹²⁸

• Has direct access to the data centers of Google, Yahoo and other major companies.¹²⁹

• Covertly and overtly infiltrate United States and foreign IT industries to weaken or gain access to encryption, often by collaborating with software companies and internet service providers themselves. They are also, according to an internal document, “responsible for identifying, recruiting and running covert agents in the global telecommunications industry.”¹³⁰

• The use of “honey traps”, luring targets into compromising positions using sex.¹³¹

• The sharing of raw intelligence data with Israel. Only official U.S. communications are affected, and there are no legal limits on the use of the data from Israel.¹³²

• Spies on porn habits of activists to discredit them.¹³³

Possibly the most shocking revelation was made on February 24, 2014. Internal documents show that the NSA is attempting to manipulate and control online discourse with “extreme tactics of deception and reputation-destruction.”¹³⁴ The documents revealed a top-secret unit known as the Joint Threat Research Intelligence Unit, or JTRIG.

Two of the core self-identified purposes of JTRIG are to inject all sorts of false material onto the internet in an effort to discredit a target, and to use social sciences such as psychology to manipulate online discourse and activism in order to generate a desirable outcome. The unit posts false information on the internet and falsely attributes it to someone else, pretend to be a ‘victim’ of a target they want to discredit, and posts negative information on various forums. In some instances, to discredit a target, JTRIG sends out ‘false flag’ emails to family and friends.

One slide describes the methods to discredit a company: Leak confidential information to the press, post negative information on forums, interfere with business deals and ruin business relationships.

The use of psychological techniques to fracture activist groups and to ‘game’ online discourse is very interesting. One document describes creating tension in a group by exploiting personal power, pre-existing cleavages and minor ideological differences. In online discourse, another document describes how to use ‘mirroring’ of language cues, expressions and emotions, and the adjustment of speech, patterns and language to manipulate opinion.

Consider the words of former NSA employee turned whistleblower Russ Tice:

“They went after – and I know this because I had my hands literally on the paperwork for these sort of things – they went after high-ranking military officers; they went after members of Congress, both Senate and the House, especially on the intelligence committees and on the armed services committees and some of the … judicial.

But they went after other ones, too. They went after lawyers and law firms. Heaps of lawyers and law firms. They went after judges. One of the judges is now sitting on the Supreme Court. I had his wiretap information in my hand. Two are former FISA court judges. They went after State Department officials.

They went after people in the executive service that were part of the White House– their own people. They went after antiwar groups. They went after … U.S. companies that that do international business. They went after U.S. banking firms and financial firms that do international business. They went after NGOs … like the Red Cross, people like that that go overseas and do humanitarian work. They went after a few antiwar civil rights groups.

Don’t tell me that there’s no abuse, because I’ve had this stuff in my hand and looked at it. And in some cases, I literally was involved in the technology that was going after this stuff. And you know, when I said to [former MSNBC show host Keith] Olbermann, [that] my particular thing is high tech and you know, what’s going on is the other thing, which is the dragnet. The dragnet is what Mark Klein is talking about, the terrestrial dragnet. Well my specialty is outer space. I deal with satellites, and everything that goes in and out of space. I did my spying via space. So that’s how I found out about this… I was worried that the intelligence community now has sway over what is going on.

Now here’s the big one. I haven’t given you any names. This was is summer of 2004. One of the papers that I held in my hand was to wiretap a bunch of numbers associated … with a 40-something-year-old wannabe senator from Illinois. You wouldn’t happen to know where that guy lives right now, would you? It’s a big white house in Washington, DC. That’s who they went after. And that’s the president of the United States now.” – Russ Tice, NSA Whistleblower¹³⁵

On March 5, 2014, it was revealed that the CIA, with the knowledge of Barack Obama, spied on members of the Senate Intelligence Committee, the group tasked with overseeing clandestine agency activities and preventing abuses.¹³⁶ The implications are complete subversion of oversight on domestic spying. Collectively, the evidence of the burgeoning security state under Barack Obama reveals a global information grid with real time access that targets both domestic citizens and lawmakers in addition to foreign people and governments.

101 Duncan Campbell, Investigative Journalist, “Echelon: World under watch, an introduction,” June 29, 2000

102 National Security Archives hosted document, “Farewell from Vice Admiral William O. Studeman to NSAEmployees, April 8, 1992.”

103 Washington Post, “Bush Administration’s Warrantless Wiretapping Program,” February 11, 2008

104 The history of Warrantless Wiretapping is laid out thoroughly at the Daily Kos Wikipedia. Each event on their timeline has a link to a primary document or an accurate source.

105 CNN, “Obama’s surveillance vote spurs blogging backlash,” July 11, 2008

106 CNN, “The Lead with Jake Tapper,” June 10, 2013

107 New York Times, “Obama’s wiretapping stand enrages many supporters,” June 2, 2008

108 RawStory, “Obama Administration Quietly expands the Bush Administration’s Legal Defense of Wiretapping,” April 7, 2009

109 The Guardian, “NSA collecting phone records of millions of Verizon customers daily,” June 6, 2013

110 The Guardian, “GCHQ intercepted foreign politicians’ communications at G20 summits,” June 17, 2013

111 The Guardian, “NSA monitored calls of 35 world leaders after US official handed over contacts,” October 25, 2013

112 The Guardian, “GCHQ taps fibre-optic cables for secret access to world’s communications,” June 21, 2013

113 Der Spiegel, “Snowden Document: NSA Spied On Al Jazeera Communications,” August 31, 2013

114 Reuters, “U.S. spy agency bugged U.N. headquarters: Germany’s Spiegel,” August 25, 2013

115 Der Spiegel, “’Follow the Money’: NSA Spies on International Payments,” September 15, 2013

116 BBC, “Report: NSA ‘collected 200m texts per day‘,” January 17, 2014

117 The Guardian, “XKeyscore: NSA tool collects ‘nearly everything a user does on the internet’,” July 31, 2013

118 New York Times,”N.S.A. Gathers Data on Social Connections of U.S. Citizens,” September 28, 2013

119 Der Spiegel, “iSpy: How the NSA Accesses Smartphone Data,” September 9, 2013

120 Der Spiegel, “Photo Gallery: Spies in the Embassy,” October 27, 2013

121 The Independent, “GCHQ used ‘Quantum Insert’ technique to set up fake LinkedIn pages and spy on mobile phone giants,” November 10, 2013

122 Der Spiegel, “‘Royal Concierge’: GCHQ Monitors Diplomats’ Hotel Bookings,” November 17, 2013

123 New York Times, “No Morsel Too Minuscule for All-Consuming N.S.A.,” November 2, 2013

124 Washington Post, “By cracking cellphone code, NSA has capacity for decoding private conversations,” December 13, 2013

125 New York Times, “N.S.A. Devises Radio Pathway Into Computers,” January 15, 2014

126 ArsTechnica, “Your USB cable, the spy: Inside the NSA’s catalog of surveillance magic,” December 31, 2013

127 New York Times, “Spies Infiltrate a Fantasy Realm of Online Games,” December 9, 2013

128 Der Spiegel, “Inside TAO: Documents Reveal Top NSA Hacking Unit,” December 29, 2013

129 Washington Post, “NSA infiltrates links to Yahoo, Google data centers worldwide, Snowden documents say,” October 30, 2013.

130 The Guardian, “Revealed: how US and UK spy agencies defeat internet privacy and security,” September 6, 2013

131 NBC, “Snowden Docs: British Spies Used Sex and ‘Dirty Tricks’,” February 7, 2014

132 The Guardian, “NSA shares raw intelligence including Americans’ data with Israel,” September 11, 2013

133 Huffington Post, “Top-Secret Document Reveals NSA Spied On Porn Habits As Part Of Plan To Discredit ‘Radicalizers’,” November 26, 2013

134 The Intercept, “How Covert Agents Infiltrate the Internet to Manipulate, Deceive, and Destroy Reputations,” February 24, 2014

135 Russ Tice’s interview available here. Partial transcript available here.

136 The Guardian, “Obama knew CIA secretly monitored intelligence committee, senator claims,” March 5, 2014

* * * *

War

It is another common misconception that during Republican presidencies we have periods of war, and during Democratic presidencies we have periods of peace. Of ‘official’ wars, it is certainly the case that the Gulf War, Afghanistan and Iraq war were begun by George H.W. and George W. Bush. Though it is important to quantify ‘official’ because there has not been a true declaration of war since World War II. After all, Bill Clinton dropped bombs on no less than four sovereign countries: Iraq, Serbia, Afghanistan, and Sudan.

And Clinton was able to get away with maintaining one of the darkest stains on America’s soiled history: the full-force economic sanctions against Iraq that began with the first Gulf war and ended after Saddam’s fall in 2003. The sanctions killed 567,000 children according to the British Medical Societies Lancet.¹³⁷ (Later studies have argued the number 350,000 children to be more accurate). The total number of deaths including adults is thought to be much higher. United Nations ambassador Madeline Albright, when asked about these numbers, coldly stated “The price is worth it.” This statement truly illuminates the attitude of those who set the agenda: Cold indifference to life on the grand chessboard of geopolitics.

Obama’s first major act of war was a no-fly zone over Libya which resulted in the removal of Muammar Gaddafi. The media had a well orchestrated propaganda campaign that garnered significant public support.

His second major act of war was the arming of Syrian rebels, undoubtedly prolonging the horrific civil war. Some of the groups that form the opposition are terrorist organizations, which mirrors the policies of Carter and Reagan arming terrorist groups in Afghanistan under Operation Cyclone.¹³⁸

But the true depths of Obama’s war mongering resides in his constant and silent drone war. A policy that started under W. Bush, Obama has expanded the use of drones extensively. He has allowed the usage of Signature Strikes, whereby drone operators bomb people they do not know, based on movements they find suspicious.¹³⁹

Worst of all is the policy of double tapping, bombing the same scene twice after rescuers have come to try and help their fellow citizens.¹⁴⁰ Obama’s drones have even bombed funerals.¹⁴¹ While the death toll of the drone war may not be as high as the conventional wars of the Bush family, the moral depravity certainly gives them a run for their money. The argument that drones are an alternative method to direct personnel involvement leaves out these cold facts.

It is important to note the presence of ‘blowback’: the concept that bombing funerals and responders to attacks will create a whole new generation of terrorists. It is almost a forbidden word in the mainstream media. For example, Ron Paul was ridiculed by pundits across the political spectrum on cable television when he insisted that blowback was a reality. While they deny it in public, many groups secretly relish the idea that their intangible enemy will only grow stronger while their profits grow larger. Drones are helping usher in the era of endless war.

Another aspect of Barack Obama’s capacity to wage war lies in his secretive ‘kill list’, which is a collection of singled out individuals deemed to pose a threat to the United States and have been selected for targeted killing.¹⁴² The list is known to include American citizens such as Anwar Al Alwaki, raising serious questions regarding human rights and legality.¹⁴³

137 The Nation, “A Hard Look at Iraq Sanctions,” November 15, 2001

138 ABC News, “U.S. Declares Syria Rebel Group Terrorists, Sending Message to Opposition,” December 12, 2012

139 New York Times, “The ‘Signature Strikes’ Program,” May 29, 2013

140 The Guardian, “US drone strikes target rescuers in Pakistan – and the west stays silent,” August 20, 2012

141 Salon, “U.S. Again Bombs Mourners,” June 4, 2012

142 The Guardian, “Obama’s secret kill list – the disposition matrix,” July 14, 2013

143 New York Times, “Secret ‘Kill List’ Proves a Test of Obama’s Principles and Will,” March 29, 2012

* * * *

Private Military and Intelligence Contractors

It has always been hard to tell exactly how many private contractors are employed by the Federal government, and how many of those are under the umbrella of the defense industry. It was under Reagan that the Pentagon’s privatization agenda began, and it has continued ever since. An NYU study on the size of government shows that the use of private contractors increased under the Clinton administration by about 25%.¹⁴⁴ It is known that Clinton hired KBR, at the time owned by Halliburton, to build military bases and support troops in Kosovo.¹⁴⁵

It was under the administration of George W. Bush, with the Iraq war, when the use of private contractors skyrocketed. By 2008, the number of private contractors in use in Iraq was 155,000, more than the number of troops, a degree of privatization unprecedented in modern warfare.¹⁴⁶ The public became acquainted with the likes of Blackwater under the Bush administration, with events such as the unprovoked massacres in Baghdad and Fallujah.¹⁴⁷

During his campaign, Obama promised to cut federal spending on private contractors.¹⁴⁸ It soon became clear, however, that much of the stimulus money would go straight to their pockets. His Afghanistan surge was primarily accomplished through contractors, which made up half of the military forces in the country by 2009.¹⁴⁹ The total number of contractors in Iraq and Afghanistan quickly reached 250,000.¹⁵⁰ Security contractors (e.g. private military forces) increased by over 400% under Obama and represent a quarter of all contractors employed by the Pentagon.¹⁵¹

The most shocking use of contractors has only recently been revealed. It turns out that they represent a significant amount of the NSA workforce. 483,000 people are employed by private contractors that work with the NSA and have ‘Top Secret’ access.¹⁵²

The potential for illicit spying and extortion represented by these numbers is so high as to reach certainty.

144 “Fact Sheet on the New True Size of Government,” NYU, Published for the Brookings Institution (PDF Warning)

145 Wikipedia article on KBR

146 The Christian Science Monitor, “A lesson from Iraq war: How to outsource war to private contractors,” March 19, 2013

147 USA Today, “What Exactly Happened That Day in Fallujah?” June 11, 2007

148 National Journal, “Cut Federal Contract Spending By At Least 10 Percent,” June 10, 2009 (If link fails,check here)

149 Talking Points Memo, “DOD: Obama’s Afghan Surge Will Rely Heavily On Private Contractors,” December 15, 2009

150 CommonDreams, “Obama Has 250,000 ‘Contractors’ in Iraq and Afghan Wars, Increases Number of Mercenaries,” June 1, 2009, written by Jeremy Scahill

151 Salon, “Obama resides over a private contractor boom,” February 24, 2004

152 Salon, “500,000 contractors can access NSA data hordes,” June 11, 2013

* * * *

Renditions

The CIA has an official policy of ‘rendition’, where they send suspected terrorists to be interrogated in foreign countries, bypassing United States torture laws. The process was used extensively during George W. Bush’s administration. But did you know that the process began under Clinton? This PBS Frontline report confirms that the rendition process began in 1995.¹⁵³

In 2007, Obama wrote an article in the Foreign Affairs journal stating:

“To build a better, freer world, we must first behave in ways that reflect the decency and aspirations of the American people… This means ending the practices of shipping away prisoners in the dead of night to be tortured in far-off countries, of detaining thousands without charge or trial, of maintaining a network of secret prisons to jail people beyond the reach of the law.”¹⁵⁴

Yet the process of rendition has continued. The Washington Post has reported that the Obama administration has “embraced rendition” and has consistently resisted lawmakers efforts to reform the policy.¹⁵⁵

153 PBS Frontline, “Rendition Timeline.”

154 Foreign Affairs, “Renewing American Leadership,” June 2007

155 Washington Post, “Renditions continue under Obama, despite due-process concerns,” January 1, 2013

* * * *

Police Militarization

Under President Bill Clinton, a provision was added to the Defense Appropriations Bill that allowed the Pentagon to transfer unused military assets to local police departments around the country.¹⁵⁶The program continued through President Bush and has been expanding throughout the Obama presidency.

“[Fiscal Year] 11 has been a historic year for the program. We reutilized more than $500M, that is million with an M, worth of property in FY 11. This passes the previous mark by several hundred million dollars.” – Disposition Services¹⁵⁷

The equipment gifted to police departments range from assault rifles and bayonets to massive vehicles such as the MRAP, which stands for Mine-Resistant Ambush Protected, of which 500 municipalities received for free from the Department of Defense in 2013.¹⁵⁸

There is also the troubling trend of the growth of asset forfeiture, the process by which, having granted itself the power to do so, the government seizes any cash, cars, property and more it can reasonably connect to a crime. This ability incentivizes sending out specialized, militarized police such as SWAT teams to serve drug warrants, as the teams themselves are expensive to maintain. This program started long before the Obama presidency, but recently it has swelled, with the Justice Department Forfeiture fund reaching $1.8 billion in 2011, with nearly half of a billion being returned to the local police departments that led the raid.¹⁵⁹

156 Huffington Post, “7 Ways The Obama Administration Has Accelerated Police Militarization,” July 10, 2013

157 Disposition Services, “October 2011 Newsletter.” (PDF Warning)

158 Reason, “Police in Columbia, South Carolina and 499 Other Cities Get “Free” Tanks,” November 18, 2013

159 Huffington Post, “7 Ways The Obama Administration Has Accelerated Police Militarization,” July 10, 2013

* * * *

Globalization

A key process in globalization involves removing national sovereignty in favor of trade agreements that favor the rights of corporations. Bill Clinton championed the NAFTA agreement, which among other issues superseded articles in the Mexican constitution, water rights in Canada, and allows corporations to sue nations when they are in violation of the trade act.¹⁶⁰

Regardless of your opinion on NAFTA and other trade agreements, Obama has taken the concept of corporate power over national sovereignty to a whole new mind-blowing level with the Trans-Pacific Partnership agreement, a trade proposal that only recently became public knowledge when the documents were leaked (Check the footnote to read the whole document).¹⁶¹ Why the secrecy?The TPP agreement bestows radical new powers on corporations, including establishing an international tribunal that would override domestic law and would have the power to issue sanctions against governments for failing to abide by their ruling.

The TPP runs contrary to Obama’s statement during his 2008 presidential campaign:

“We will not negotiate bilateral trade agreements that stop the government from protecting the environment, food safety, or the health of its citizens; give greater rights to foreign investors than to U.S. investors; require the privatization of our vital public services; or prevent developing country governments from adopting humanitarian licensing policies to improve access to life-saving medications.”¹⁶²

Congressman Alan Grayson summed it up nicely: “It’s all about tying the hands of democratically elected governments, and shunting authority over to the non-elected for the benefit of multinational corporations. It’s an assault on democratic government.”¹⁶³

The TPP has what is called an ‘investor-state dispute settlement mechanism’ which allow companies and investors to sue governments for losses of profits due to the government’s policies.¹⁶⁴ The deliberations would be undertaken by an international group of corporate lawyers and threatens to overrule democracies and threaten our legal rights.

It is not an exaggeration to say that in many instances this agreement gives more power to corporations than governments.

160 Wikipedia article on NAFTA

161 TPP Document

162 (PDF Warning) 2008 DNCC Platform, available here.

163 Huffington Post, “Alan Grayson On Trans-Pacific Partnership: Obama Secrecy Hides ‘Assault On Democratic Government‘,” June 18, 2013.

164 Union Solidarity International, “TPP and TTIP: the corporate coup behind the acronyms,” November 18, 2013

* * * *

Conclusion

The One-Party State is the result of special interests, economic and military intelligence having gained a strong enough foothold in Washington to subvert the political process. The saying that power is in guns and money has never been truer. The corruption has been heavily and cleverly obfuscated behind a wall of relentless partisan rhetoric that magnify the small differences between presidential candidates.

Consider the major initiatives of the Obama presidency. His Affordable Care Act has been championed as a bastion of liberal reform, but in reality it is simply forcing Americans to purchase health plans from private corporations. His raising of the top tax bracket is proffered as proof of a liberal agenda, however the tax burden is still squarely on the middle class. In addition, the wealthiest Americans are virtually unaffected, as their wealth resides in assets and investments, not income. We are left with a platform that is nearly indistinguishable from his predecessors, from which Obama promised significant change.

When George Bush bombs a foreign country, liberals cry foul and protest in droves. When Obama does the same thing, the previous protestors often become supporters of the policy. The same phenomenon can be seen on the other side of the aisle. Conservatives are quick to criticize the expansion of programs under Democratic presidents, but stand silent while Reagan and the Bush family oversaw many of the largest expansions of the Federal government and budget in the history of the United States.

It should be clear after even a cursory inspection of the legacies of presidencies from the last 30 years that there is very little tangible differences between the two parties. The shockingly establishment-oriented agenda of Barack Obama ought to be waking up millions of people to this truth.

Can we work within the system to change the One Party State? How do we approach future elections knowing that there are no real alternatives to be found within the two parties? Even candidates with exceptionally favorable rhetoric cannot be trusted to translate their platform into actual policies.

It is possible to dismiss the previous two chapters as a result of ‘market forces’, that endless war and the One-Party state are the result of uncoordinated actors in a free market. Even if this was the case, the implications and subsequent need for reform would be tremendous. The result can accurately be described as the dirty ‘F’ word: Fascism. I understand that there will be a lot who disagree with this designation; I argue that the term has many different meanings and many prominent people have used it in different ways. If you feel that another term best describes the phenomenon, that is OK, ultimately it is not important what semantics we apply.

Fascism (or whichever term you prefer) is appropriate because the system has evolved into collusion between the military and economic entities to mutually ensure each others entrenchment. It has grown out of control, and perhaps no evidence is stronger than the fact that the media almost invariably refuses to indicate something might be wrong, as they have been enveloped by the system.

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. What is responsible for the massive disconnect between lack of differences between presidential candidates and the vitriolic rhetoric in the media and on Capitol Hill?

2. Why has Barack Obama reversed his position on so much of his campaign platform?

3. What forces are the driving factors in the constant overseas military and economic hegemony?

4. Who is driving the creation of agreements such as the Trans-Pacific Partnership and where does the order of secrecy come from?

5. Which covert institutions could be influencing the policy of elected officials?

* * * *

Chapter III: Psychopathy, Power and Politics

“There is no such thing, in the psychopathic universe, as the ‘merely weak’. Whoever is weak is also a sucker; that is, someone who demands to be exploited” – Psychologist Robert Rieber¹⁶⁵

Psychopathy

What exactly does the word mean? Entertainment media bombards us with a particular version of the psychopath, one that is irrational, dangerous and violent. Someone who doesn’t fit in, who ‘just doesn’t seem right’. Is this an accurate description?

Dr. Robert D. Hare, an eminent psychologist on the subject of psychopathy, portrays the disorder in a drastically different light. In his book Without Conscience, he describes psychopaths as being conscienceless yet rational, not suffering from any insanity or debilitation; instead they are logical, manipulative, predisposed to crime, selfish and without guilt, shame, remorse or empathy.¹⁶⁶ In other words, these men and women are not mentally ill in the sense that we traditionally imagine. Psychopathy is surely an illness, but it is not a neurosis that will manifest symptoms others can easily perceive. Often, the psychopath will be aware of his condition and completely conceal his aberrant traits.

In Without Conscience, Dr. Hare presents numerous case studies and statistics to illuminate the world of the psychopath; the evidence points towards a world full of people programmed for evil. Dr. Hare stresses multiple times that the psychopath is someone who has a strong desire for power and the need to manipulate others, not for personal gain but simply for the sake of manipulation. While some psychopaths are erratic, others have the ability to completely conceal their condition behind a carefully constructed social persona.

Dr. Hare’s list of psychopathic personality traits include:

• Displaying glibness and superficial charm

• Being in constant need of stimulation and prone to excessive boredom

• Acting in a conning or manipulative way

• Showing shallow emotional responses

• Acting out promiscuous sexual behavior

• Behaving irresponsibly

• Avoiding long term relationships

• Feeling a grandiose sense of self worth

• Lying repeatedly without remorse

• Lacking any remorse or guilt

• Lacking empathy for others

• Having poor behavioral controls

• Displaying behavioral problems early on in life

• Behaving impulsively

• Failing to accept responsibility for actions

• Displaying signs of criminal diversity

Dr. Hare’s predecessor Harvey Cleckly, perhaps the first psychologist to study the psychopathic phenomenon decades earlier, compiled a similar list:

• Superficial charm and average intelligence.

• Absence of delusions and other signs of irrational thinking.

• Absence of nervousness or neurotic manifestations.

• Unreliability.

• Untruthfulness and insincerity.

• Lack of remorse or shame.

• Antisocial behavior without apparent compunction.

• Poor judgment and failure to learn from experience.

• Pathological egocentricity and incapacity to love.

• General poverty in major affective reactions.

• Specific loss of insight.

• Unresponsiveness in general interpersonal relations.

• Fantastic and uninviting behavior with drink, and sometimes without.

• Sex life impersonal, trivial, and poorly integrated.

Most of the case studies Dr. Hare presents in his book are from the prison population and anecdotal accounts from those who have been abused. This is a natural, structural problem in the study of psychopathy: the study is limited for the most part to the ‘Unsuccessful Psychopath’, those who could not conceal their traits or whose social circumstances led to blue-collar crime.

Yet Dr. Hare also spends some significant time devoted to the ‘Subdeviant Criminal’, the psychopath who has control over his deviance and the ability to hide it from the populace. Instead of the petty criminal, these men and women occupy positions in business, government, industry, and law. Their condition goes entirely unnoticed by the populace; their employers, peers, even their family and those who love them are fooled.

How can such deception be possible? Consider that psychopathy is not an ‘acquired’ illness. Instead, it has strong genetic components and manifests itself in early childhood.^{167 168 169 170} From an early age, the psychopath recognizes that to fit into society in any manner they need to develop to ability to lie extensively. Over time, they become exceptionally good at it. Their entire public persona becomes one complex act, a web of lies to hide their deviant personality.

165 Professor Robert W. Rieber, a Fellow at Columbia University and eminent Psychologist and Historian.Quote available here, taken from his book The Individual, Communication and Society: Essays in Memory

166 When discussing books, I will try my best to find a publicly available PDF; For Without Conscience, I was unable to. You can view the details of the book on Amazon.com here.

167 Blonigen, Daniel M. et. al. (2005), “Psychopathic personality traits: heritability and genetic overlap with internalizing and externalizing psychopathology.” Psychol Med

168 Glenn, Andrea L. et. al. (2011), “Evolutionary theory and psychopathy.” Aggression and Violent Behavior(PDF Warning)

169 Caspi, A, et. al. (2002). “Role of Genotype in the Cycle of Violence in Maltreated Children.” Science

170 Tikkanen, Roope et. al. (2011). “Psychopathy, PCL-R, and MAOA genotype as predictors of violent reconvictions”. Psychiatry Research

* * * *

Sadism

A recent series of studies published in Psychological Science highlights the pleasure that persons with psychopathic tendencies derive from abusing others. These studies reveal that certain people take great pleasure in sadistic behavior, suggesting that in these subjects there is an “intrinsic motivation to inflict suffering on innocent others, even at a personal cost.”¹⁷¹

In one experiment, researcher Erin Buckels, from the University of British Columbia, found that there is a certain subset of people who chose to intensify the discomfort of others through directed white noise once they found that there would be no consequences for their actions. They were also willing to expend extra time and energy to be able to amplify the discomfort they were causing their ‘opponent’.

“Some find it hard to reconcile sadism with the concept of ‘normal’ psychological functioning, but our findings show that sadistic tendencies among otherwise well-adjusted people must be acknowledged,” – Erin Buckels

“The researchers hope that these new findings will help to broaden people’s view of sadism as an aspect of personality that manifests in everyday life, helping to dispel the notion that sadism is limited to sexual deviants and criminals,” – Association for Psychological Science

Erin Buckels concludes that her research may offer valuable insights into domestic abuse, animal abuse, and military and police brutality, through the understanding that disposition to sadism and abuse is a personality trait that manifests itself in every day life. The true insights which can be derived from her work and those of other psychopathy researchers go much deeper than police brutality; they shed much needed light on the widespread relationship between evil and power.

171 Association for Psychological Science, “Everyday Sadists Take Pleasure In Others’ Pain,” September 12, 2013

* * * *

Secondary Psychopathy

Understanding the nature of psychopathy alone does not reveal the full picture. Numerous researchers have differentiated between ‘primary psychopathy’, that which is genetic, and ‘secondary psychopathy’, that which is acquired through environment.^{172, 173, 174} Unlike the primary psychopath, who is born with their condition and lacks entirely the capacity for empathy and other higher human emotions, the secondary psychopath occasionally manifests these traits.

In other words, non-psychopathic individuals can exhibit psychopathic behaviors through the conditioning of their environment. Two well known studies in psychology underscore this.

The first is the Milgram Experiment. A volunteer would be placed at a booth with an apparatus that sends an electric shock to a person in another room. The volunteer believes the man in the other room is a fellow volunteer; in reality he is an actor that is not actually receiving electric shocks. The volunteer asks the actor a series of questions, a wrong answer means the use of an increasingly high voltage of shocking.

The volunteer would be prompted by a man in a lab coat to continue administering the shocks long after it had become unsafe. The verbal prodding would range between ‘Please continue’ and ‘You have no other choice, you must continue’. After the shock reached 300 volts, the actor would stop answering, but the man in the lab coat would continue insisting on shocks. Dr. Stanley Milgram repeatedly found that nearly 2/3rds of people would continue to the maximum voltage of 450, long after they had believed their peer to be incapacitated.

Regarding the experiment, Milgram wrote:

“Ordinary people, simply doing their jobs, and without any particular hostility on their part, can become agents in a terrible destructive process. Moreover, even when the destructive effects of their work become patently clear, and they are asked to carry out actions incompatible with fundamental standards of morality, relatively few people have the resources needed to resist authority.”

The second experiment is the Stanford Prison Experiment. Volunteers were asked to simulate a prison in Stanford’s psychology hall; half of the participants simulated prisoners and the other half guards. The guards were told to make the prisoners feel powerless though not resort to violence. Zimbardo, the lead experimenter, found that many of the guards stepped far beyond the boundaries of what had been predicted, leading to dangerous and psychologically damaging situations. A third of the guards had displayed ‘genuine sadistic tendencies’. Some prisoners were emotionally traumatized and had to leave the experiment early. Zimbardo argued that his experiment shows that people internalize authority and submission.

Though the nature of the Stanford Prison Experiment does not lend itself to empiricism, it does give some credence to the idea that ‘power corrupts’ and changes people. Furthermore, an experiment published in August 2012 by the Journal of Experimental Psychology showed definite psychological changes associated with power. It found that people who considered themselves in positions of power literally perceived the world around them differently.¹⁷⁵

We would like to think that humanity has evolved since these experiments took place, and since the atrocities that were revealed after World War II. Unfortunately, this is not the case. In 2008, the Stanley Milgram study was reproduced, with only slight alterations to conform to modern ethical standards, and found the exact same results: A vast majority of participants were willing to inflict significant pain on another human if pressured to do so by perceived authority.¹⁷⁶

We do not need to rely on psychological studies to see the power of perceived authority causing abuses: we have tangible evidence of the relationship emerging frequently from the War on Terror. Most recently, it was revealed that the CIA made doctors and psychologists working at various Department of Defense institutions violate the ethical codes of their profession in order to become involved with the torture and degrading treatment of terror suspects.¹⁷⁷

“Medical professionals were in effect told that their ethical mantra “first do no harm” did not apply, because they were not treating people who were ill.” – The Guardian

The report, compiled by the Taskforce on Preserving Medical Professionalism in National Security Detention Centers, supported by the Institute on Medicine as a Profession (IMAP), found that doctors working with the Department of Defense and CIA routinely participated in waterboarding, sleep deprivation and force-feeding, the latter being against the rules of World Medical Association and the American Medical Association, while gathering and sharing intelligence.

“The American public has a right to know that the covenant with its physicians to follow professional ethical expectations is firm regardless of where they serve. It’s clear that in the name of national security the military trumped that covenant, and physicians were transformed into agents of the military and performed acts that were contrary to medical ethics and practice. We have a responsibility to make sure this never happens again.” – Dr Gerald Thomson, professor of medicine emeritus at Columbia University and member of the taskforce.

While participation in waterboarding and force-feeding may not be shocking to the desensitized public’s sensibilities, it is still very revealing that physicians and psychologists who would otherwise balk at the suggestion that they would violate their professions ethical codes, do so without hesitation when it is done in the name of War. And after all, the United States did sentence Japanese war criminals to death for the act of waterboarding during the International Military Tribunal for the Far East following World War II.¹⁷⁸

Armed with this context, it is easy to understand the ease with which psychopaths can manipulate institutions and societies. A majority of people do not even have the psychological capacity to refuse authority, at least under situations of pressure. Putting the average citizen in positions of minor authority such as a police officer can cause behavioral and physiological changes in that person, disposing them to abuse. Therefore a psychopath in a position of power essentially has a vast pool of tools at their disposal to act out their twisted desires of manipulation and control.

172 Newman, Joseph P. et. al. (2005), “Validating a Distinction Between Primary and Secondary Psychopathy With Measures of Gray’s BIS and BAS Constructs”. Journal of Abnormal Psychology (PDF Warning)

173 Skeem, Jennifer et. al. (2007), “Two Subtypes of Psychopathic Violent Offenders That Parallel Primary and Secondary Variants”. Journal of Abnormal Psychology (PDF Warning)

174 Dean, Andy C. et. al. (2013), “Secondary psychopathy, but not primary psychopathy, is associated with risky decision-making in noninstitutionalized young adults”. Elsevier

175 Yapp, Andy et. al. (2012). “The powerful size others down: The link between power and estimates of others’ size.” The Journal of Experimental Psychology. (PDF Warning)

176 BBC, “People ‘still willing to torture‘,” December 19, 2008

177 The Guardian, “CIA made doctors torture suspected terrorists after 9/11, taskforce finds,” November 4, 2013

178 Huffington Post, “Yes, National Review, We Did Execute Japanese for Waterboarding,” April 24, 2009

* * * *

The Pathocracy

Psychopathy is not a rare phenomenon: Dr. Hare estimates that psychopaths consist of 1% of the population, other psychologists have estimates as high as 4%.¹⁷⁹ That represents between 3 and 12 million Americans, millions of which are the ‘Subdeviant Criminals’ of Dr. Hare’s lexicon, residing in positions of power with a psychological need to control and manipulate others. They are drawn to certain occupations that allow them to wield power over others, such as police, military, intelligence, and finance. Over time, they begin to saturate important institutions, being more ruthless and willing to cause more destruction in their rise up the ladder of power than their competition.

In the exact same manner that you and I naturally exclude deviants from our social groups, psychopaths naturally exclude those of us who allow conscience and morality to influence our decisions and perceptions. The result is a web of mutual conditioning of ‘evil’, where goals and actions become increasingly removed from the institutions original intention. This process has been occurring for centuries in banks, clandestine agencies, military, police departments, and governments, in nearly every instance hiding behind rhetoric and ideology that masks their true nature.

The rise of this process over decades results in a phenomenon known as Pathocracy.

pathocracy (n). A system of government created by a small pathological minority that takes control over a society.¹⁸⁰

Pathocracies have existed throughout history and many exist in the present. Unfortunately, there is a considerable amount of evidence that the United States has evolved into such a system of government, where clandestine and financial institutions saturated with psychopaths have gained enough influence to subvert the democratic process. Their rise to power coincided with the draping of a veil over their existence, through powerful propaganda and subtlety in action. This book is the history of the modern American psychopath in a position of power, and the goal is to lift the veil.

179 Harvard Psychologist Martha Stout makes the 4% claim in her book The Sociopath Next Door.

180 Definition taken from Andrew Lobaczewski, a Polish Psychologist who dedicated his life to studying the Pathocratic phenomenon of the Soviet Bloc. His book Political Ponerology is dense but immensely important.You can read it here.

Note: Feeling overwhelmed with this material? Take an inspiration break in our Inspiration Center.

* * * *

Chapter IV: Operation Paperclip

“What you were made to feel was that the country was in desperate peril and we had to do whatever it took to save it.” – Hugh Cunningham, CIA Official¹⁸¹

As the Western Theater of World War II came to a close, there was a mad rush between the Soviet Union and the United States to be the first army to enter and secure Germany. It was not for consideration of land; that would be meted out later during the Yalta and Potsdam conferences. Nor was it to capture the Nazi leadership and bring them to trial for their heinous crimes against humanity.

In fact, the goal was the opposite. The rush to secure Germany was much more about securing Germany’s infrastructure: their leadership and the best minds in intelligence, science and industry.NationalArchives.gov hosts a list of over 1,500 Nazis that were transferred into America, many of them rampant war criminals.¹⁸² It has been released to the public only recently thanks to the Nazi War Crimes Disclosure Act. The project that oversaw this endeavor is known as Operation Paperclip and was undertaken by the Office Of Strategic Services, the precursor to the CIA.

President Harry Truman formally ordered the Operation in August 1945, but it had covertly begun months earlier, in May. Truman’s orders expressly forbid the transfer of any person known “to have been a member of the Nazi Party, and more than a nominal participant in its activities, or an active supporter of Nazi militarism”.¹⁸³

This directive was not followed, for it would have prevented the acquisition of a lot of prominent Nazis such as Arthur Rudolph, who endorsed the usage of slave labor from concentration camps for the building of the V2 rocket¹⁸⁴ and later became a prominent figure in NASA.¹⁸⁵ More people would die building the V2 rocket – a number estimated at 60,000 – than were killed by it in combat.¹⁸⁶

The dossiers of prominent Nazis brought into the United States such as Wernher von Braun cannot be found on the National Archives sheet; we can conclude that either identities were faked and whitewashed during the process, or the 1,500 names is an incomplete tally. Regardless, we can conclude that the order of Truman was not heeded, and many former Nazis became entrenched within the United States science, intelligence and industrial industries, undoubtedly contributing to a web of psychopathic conditioning.

There are many interesting profiles of war criminals who found employment in the United States after the war. Krunoslav Draganovic, for example, was a Franciscan priest who actively served the Nazi satellite regime in Croatia, where they were responsible for over 350,000 deaths. He also facilitated the escape of numerous Croatian war criminals through the assets of the clergy. After the war, he was hired as a U.S. spy.¹⁸⁷

Kurt Blome was the director of the Nazi Biological Warfare program and former SS officer. He oversaw nerve gas experimentation on prisoners at Auschwitz, and established the bioweapons research center for Heinrich Himmler. One of his experiments involved inoculating prisoners with the plague and recording its progression.¹⁸⁸ He was hired by the US Army Chemical Corps in 1951 to work on chemical warfare research.¹⁸⁹

The most interesting case study is that of Reinhard Gehlen, a Major General in the German Wehrmacht, close confidant of Hitler, and head of the German Army Intelligence on the Eastern Front. The OSS found that Gehlen’s knowledge of the Soviets that he had gained during World War II was so important that not only did they let him keep his job, he was able to maintain a vast majority of his infrastructure. What became known as the Gehlen organization functioned as a semi-autonomous intelligence unit for the United States and West Berlin, and employed over 100 former Gestapo and SS officers.¹⁹⁰

“The Gehlen Organization was the one group that did have networks inside Eastern Europe, and that is why we hired them… Hiring Gehlen was the biggest mistake the US ever made. Our allies said, ‘You are putting Nazis at the senior levels of your intelligence’, and they were right. The Gehlen organization was the primary source of intelligence that claimed that, ‘The Soviets were about to attack West Germany’ …that was the biggest bunch of baloney then and it is still a bunch of baloney today. Gehlen had to make his money by creating a threat that we were afraid of, so we would give him more money to tell us about it.

In my opinion, the Gehlen Organization provided nothing worthwhile for understanding or estimating Soviet military or political capabilities in Eastern Europe or anywhere else. The Gehlen organization had been penetrated by Soviet intelligence and many of the US Nazi assets were now double agents, taking CIA wages and turning around and selling information to the enemy.” – Victor Marchetti, CIA Veteran and former Chief of Soviet Strategic War Plans¹⁹¹

The lack of internal security in the Gehlen Organization was egregious. One former Army Counter-Intelligence Corps officer lamented:

“Recruiting methods then employed were so loose that former German Officers and noncoms were blindly being approached to work for American Intelligence in espionage activity directed against the USSR.”¹⁹²

Not only did this mean that the Gehlen Organization became saturated with radical Nazis and other fascist elements, it also served as an easy entry of infiltration by the Soviet Union. The organization functioned semi-autonomously so strict controls over their operations was impossible.

The Soviet press did not hesitate to use the Gehlen Organization as an effective propaganda tool, pointing out that the West had maintained the very intelligence unit that was responsible for a long series of crimes against humanity along the Eastern Front of the War. Future Director of Central Intelligence Richard Helms stated that:

“The reports in the Soviet-dominated press in Germany concerning the use of former German staff and intelligence is such that there is no question that the Russians know this operation is going on even though they got some of the details wrong… Certainly the fact that so much publicity has been given to this indicates serious flaws in the Operation.”¹⁹³

One official CIA document titled “Forging an Intelligence Partnership: The CIA and the Origins of the BND, 1945-49”, noted that the Gehlen Organization would take CIA assets that they received and then sell them on the black market for more funds.¹⁹⁴ The reference is vague but likely refers to selling arms and ammunition to various underground right wing elements.

Consider this: At the end of the War, the Office of Strategic Services was a small organization of 13,000 members¹⁹⁵, and the Gehlen organization consisted of at least 4,000 members by the year 1949.¹⁹⁶ Can we accurately say that United States intelligence absorbed the Nazi infrastructure without considering how much of an influence it had on the beginnings of these clandestine institutions?

181 John Marks, “The Search for the Manchurian Candidate: The CIA and Mind Control” 1979. Despite the sensationalist title, John Marks’ book is a model of academic integrity and a treasure trove of information. The book is derived from information taken from 16,000 CIA files received through the Freedom of Information Act, and interviews with the few officials who would agree to talk. PDF available here.

182 Records of the Office of the Secretary of Defense (Record Group 330), NationalArchives.gov

183 Wikipedia article on Project Paperclip

184 http://history.msfc.nasa.gov/vonbraun/excerpts.html

185 New York Times, “NASA Refuses to Comment on it’s Former Official”, October 18 1984. “Mr. Rudolph directed the building of the Saturn 5 rocket that carried the Apollo astronauts to the moon and managed other space and missile programs… He was awarded the Exceptional Service Medal in 1968 and the Distinguished Service Medal, the agency’s highest honor, the following year.”

186 http://www.v2rocket.com/start/chapters/mittel.html

187 From the Federation of American Scientists, information uncovered from the Nazi War Crimes Disclosure Act. http://www.fas.org/sgp/news/2002/05/nara050802.html

188 Robert Kirkconnel, “American Heart of Darkness.” Excerpt available here.

189 Wikipedia article on Kurt Blome

190 This information comes from the National Security Archives, a fantastic resource run by George Washington University. They are a leader in hosting important documents and declassifying more through Freedom of Information Act requests. They will be linked to many times throughout this book. The specific information on Reinhard Gehlen can be found here.

191 Christopher Simpson, “Blowback.” Excerpt available here.

192 CIA History Staff, “Forging an Intelligence Partnership: The CIA and the Origins of the BND, 1945-49” (1999). (PDF Warning)

193 Ibid.

194 Ibid.

195 Wikipedia article on the Office of Strategic Services

196 CIA History Staff

* * * *

Further Complicity

Although the Nazi War Crimes Disclosure Act has been a wealth of information regarding the early relationships between the CIA and former Nazi’s, there is still a lot that we do not know.

“The Central Intelligence Agency is refusing to provide hundreds of thousands of pages of documents sought by a government working group under a 1998 law that requires full disclosure of classified records related to Nazi war criminals, say Congressional officials from both parties.” – New York Times¹⁹⁷

The New York Times article goes on to describe how the CIA has interpreted the Nazi War Crimes Act in an exceptionally narrow fashion, refusing to release many more documents.

“Historians who have studied the documents made public so far have said that at least five associates of the Nazi leader Adolf Eichmann, the architect of Hitler’s campaign to exterminate Jews, had worked for the CIA.”

Though we can only speculate, it is possible that some of these suppressed files contain collaboration with other elements who assisted in protecting Nazis during and after the fall of the Third Reich. For example, the Red Cross and the Vatican collaborated to smuggle thousands of war criminals to safety immediately after the fall of Nazi Germany.¹⁹⁸ They used underground passages known as ‘ratlines’ to keep the men out of sight. The Red Cross issued legitimate travel documents to many Nazi members: it is estimated that over 8,000 SS members ended up in Britain and Canada alone. These revelations shed light on how prominent Nazis such as Adolf Eichmann and Dr. Josef Mengele were able to escape from Germany and hide from Allied authorities and hide out for decades.

197 New York Times, “C.I.A. Said to Rebuff Congress on Nazi Files,” January 30, 2005

198 The Guardian, “Red Cross and Vatican helped thousands of Nazis to escape,” May 25, 2011

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. What effect did the influx of Nazis have on the agenda of the CIA and other institutions that they inhabited?

2. Why was OSS leadership so interested in providing safety for high profile Nazi’s, despite the wishes of the President?

3. Is it possible that the friendly post-war relationship between the Gehlen Organization and the CIA indicates a form of relationship during and before the war as well?

4. What type of influence has the Gehlen Organization had on the development of Western Germany?

* * * *

Chapter V: MK-ULTRA

“In the 1950’s and early 1960’s, the agency gave mind-altering drugs to hundreds of unsuspecting Americans in an effort to explore the possibilities of controlling human consciousness. Many of the human guinea pigs were mental patients, prisoners, drug addicts and prostitutes – ”people who could not fight back,” as one agency officer put it. In one case, a mental patient in Kentucky was dosed with LSD continuously for 174 days.” – New York Times¹⁹⁹

MK-ULTRA is the codename given to a CIA research operation into biological behavioral engineering, also known as mind control. Many people are familiar with the operation but incorrectly assume that it was limited to LSD research. While there were plenty of resources devoted to LSD research, it was only one area of a vast field of mind control operations. MK-ULTRA researcher Ike Feldman said himself that:

“The LSD… that was just the tip of the iceberg… Espionage. Assassinations. Dirty tricks. Drug experiments. Sexual encounters and the study of prostitutes for clandestine use. That is what I was doing when I worked for George White and the CIA.”²⁰⁰

MK-ULTRA had several precursors. There was Project Chatter in 1947, which tested drugs such as the infamous Scopolamine during interrogations.²⁰¹ There was Project Bluebird in 1949, which began studies into hypnosis.²⁰² The document describing the initiation of Project Bluebird outlines these special problems, among many others, that they were hoping to address:

• Can we in a matter of an hour, two hours, one day, etc., induce an hypnotic condition in an unwilling subject to such an extent that he will perform an act for our benefit?

• Can we create by post-hypnotic control an action contrary to an individual’s basic moral principles?

• Can we guarantee total amnesia under any and all conditions?

• Can we “alter” a person’s personality? How long will it hold?

• Can we devise a system for making unwilling subjects into willing agents and then transfer that control to untrained agency agents in the field by use of codes or identifying signs or credentials?²⁰³

Project Artichoke began in 1951, with a scope of … “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?”²⁰⁴ All of the above projects were shuttled into MK-ULTRA in 1953, under the Technical Services Division, combining over 150 sub-projects²⁰⁵, undertaken at over 80 institutions²⁰⁶ such as universities, hospitals, prisons and pharmaceutical companies. Many of the projects were covertly ran through front organizations without the knowledge of the institution that hosted them.

The experiments and operations under MK-ULTRA have been shrouded in extreme secrecy. When it was enacted, then-CIA Director Allen Dulles exempted the program from normal financial controls, allowed the Technical Services Staff to begin experiments without contracts or written agreements with leadership, and ordered the financial office to pay any cost blindly on the signature of Sidney Gottlieb.²⁰⁷ CIA Document 17748 states that:

“There are just two individuals in TSD who have full substantial knowledge of the program and most of that knowledge is unrecorded. Both are highly skilled, highly motivated, professionally competent individuals. Part of their competence lies in their command of intelligence tradecraft. In protecting the sensitive nature of the American intelligence capability to manipulate human behavior, they apply “need to know” doctrine to their professional associates and their clerical assistants to a maximum degree…

TSD has pursued a policy of minimum documentation in keeping with the high sensitivity of some of the projects… The lack of consistent records precludes use of routine inspection procedures and raised a variety of questions regarding management and fiscal controls.”²⁰⁸

The two individuals the document refers to are likely Sidney Gottlieb, the director of MK-ULTRA, and Richard Helms, the Deputy Director of the CIA. In 1973, when Richard Helms became the Director of the CIA, he ordered all of the available MK-ULTRA files to be destroyed.²⁰⁹ Thanks to a clerical error, about 20,000 files survived the destruction order. However, not only were most of the files destroyed, but many experiments were so sensitive that they were never recorded in the first place, so we must understand that as brutal and astonishing as the recorded experimentation is, we are only seeing the tip of the iceberg.

Another file, MK-ULTRA document 87624, states:

“6% of the projects are of such an ultra-sensitive nature that they cannot and should not be handled by means of contracts which would associate CIA or the Government with the work in question. This 6% of the current research effort now lies entirely within two well-defined fields of endeavor… As present this results in ridiculous contracts, often with cut-outs, which do not spell out the scope or intent of the work.”²¹⁰

The first ‘well-defined field of endeavor’ described by the document is developing the capability of biological and chemical weapons for the purpose of mind control. The second field of endeavor is entirely redacted from the document.

199 New York Times, “Sidney Gottlieb, 80, Dies; Took LSD to C.I.A.,” March 10, 1999

200 Interview excerpt provided by Historian Dick Russell, available here.

201 Wikipedia article on Project Chatter

202 Summary of book “Bluebird” by Colin A. Ross, MD.

203 Declassified CIA document 140401 on Project Bluebird. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

204 Declassifed CIA documents on Project Artichoke available here. See also excellent summary of all declassified CIA documents.

205 1977 Congressional Hearings available on New York Times website here.

206 New York Times, “80 Institutions Used in Mind Control Studies”, August 4, 1977

207 John Marks, “The Search for the Manchurian Candidate: The CIA and Mind Control” 1979. Despite the sensationalist title, John Marks’ book is a model of academic integrity and a treasure trove of information. The book is derived from information taken from 16,000 CIA files received through the Freedom of Information Act, and interviews with the few officials who would agree to talk. PDF available here

208 Declassified CIA document 17748. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

209 “An Interview with Richard Helms” CIA.gov

210 Declassified CIA document 87624. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

* * * *

Ewen Cameron

Dr. Ewen Cameron was a Scottish-born Psychiatrist who worked in the United States after World War II and subsequently accepted an invitation to contract for the CIA. He would commute to the McGill University system in Canada to conduct experiments on brainwashing, ‘psychic driving’ and other forms of psychological torture. Cameron had a theory that a person with a psychological illness such as schizophrenia would benefit from having their brain essentially wiped clean, presuming the patient would redevelop their cognitive functions without the disorder. The CIA felt that brainwashing had obvious intelligence applications.²¹¹

Dr. Cameron had a ‘depatterning’ program he used to erase the minds of his patients that began with 15 – 30 days of ‘sleep therapy’ (sometimes lasting as long as 65 days), where the patient would sleep all day and night, with the exception of three brief periods where a sleep-inducing drug cocktail and electroshock therapy would be administered.

Cameron’s electroshock therapy has been documented to be between 20 – 40 times more intense than the professional standard at the time. Instead of 110 volts at a fraction of a second, Cameron used 150 volts for an initial shock lasting one full second, and then between five and nine additional shocks during the convulsions of the patient, using a muscle relaxant to prevent permanent damage. The next step was to play taped messages to a patient 16 hours a day for multiple months in an attempt to program the desired behavior.²¹²

Over half of his patients have suffered permanent amnesia of their lives before their ‘depatterning’. They were not told that they would be participating in experiments prior to their admittance. A large group of Cameron’s victims brought a lawsuit against the CIA in 1988 which was settled out of court, so the agency would not have to admit any official wrongdoing.

Why the interest in electroshock? CIA Document 190885 reveals that the CIA was interested in the “guaranteed amnesia” that electric shock often resulted in.²¹³

211 John Marks, “The Search for the Manchurian Candidate,” PDF available here

212 Ibid

213 Declassified CIA document 190885. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

* * * *

‘Front’ Organizations

“The C.I.A. used a front organization called the Society for the Investigation of Human Ecology to help pay for the work of Dr. Cameron, a psychiatrist who directed the Allan Memorial Institute in Montreal. Dr. Cameron died in 1967.

The money was provided to Dr. Cameron as part of the C.I.A.’s effort in the 1950’s and 60’s to develop drugs or techniques that could control human behavior.

Patients of Dr. Cameron were subjected to a regimen that included heavy doses of LSD and barbiturates, the application of powerful electric shocks two or three times a day, and prolonged periods of drug-induced sleep. According to Government records, the patients and their relatives were not told they were taking part in experiments.

“Joseph Rauh, another lawyer for the plaintiffs, said many of Dr. Cameron’s patients ‘were very greatly damaged by the experiments.’” – New York Times²¹⁴

The use of ‘fronts’, meaning a private enterprise secretly owned by the CIA to conceal affiliations with the agency, is standard practice and widespread through MK- ULTRA. The Society for the Investigation of Human Ecology was nominally associated with Stanford and considered to be relatively prestigious in the field. It would often award ‘cover grants’ to conceal that the bulk of its research had military intelligence applications.²¹⁵

214 New York Times, “C.I.A. Near Settlement of Lawsuit by Subjects of Mind-Control Tests.” October 6, 1988

215 Document available here.

* * * *

Unwitting Testing

The CIA had an official policy of ‘terminal experiments’, which essentially meant surreptitious administration of drugs to discover how subjects would react when they were not aware they were being experimented on. The justification was that it was the only way to truly discover the reactions of the mind under stress and exposed to various mind control chemicals. The policy was upheld even after it led to deaths.

One high profile fatality was that of Dr. Frank Olson, a scientist from the Army Chemical Corps’ Special Operations Division. During a joint Army-CIA gathering at Deep Creek Lodge in the woods of Northern Maryland, Sidney Gottlieb added LSD to the drinks of the few men in attendance, and did not inform them until the effects started to begin.

Dr. Frank Olson was one of these men, and unlike his peers, he was not able to handle the effects of the psychedelic. His colleagues described his reaction as ‘psychotic’. He survived the trip, but entered a deep depression and ended up jumping out a window of the window of a New York hotel a week later.

The death of Dr. Olsen prompted an internal review by the CIA of surreptitious testing, but the policy was resumed just a few months later. One CIA document, issued nearly a decade after Olsen’s death, affirmed the internal consensus of unwitting administration of drugs: “(Officers) argued for the continuation of unwitting testing, using as the principal point that controlled testing cannot be depended upon for accurate results. General Carter, Mr. Kirkpatrick, and I do not disagree with this point.”²¹⁶

Another aspect of unwitting testing involves experimentation of children. Although most of MK-ULTRA experiments on minors has been covered up, a New York Times article from 1995 reveals a disturbing glimpse, stating that:

“About 9000 Americans, including children and newborns, were used in 154 radiation tests sponsored by the Atomic Energy Commission, the Energy Department’s Cold War predecessor, Government officials said today… Some participated with little or no knowledge of risks they faced.”²¹⁷

216 Document text available at Cryptome.org here.

217 New York Times, “Officials Cite More U.S. Tests With Radiation,” February 10, 1995. (PDF Warning)

* * * *

Entrapment

One program uncovered during the internal CIA review centered around George White, a CIA associate who formally worked for the Federal Bureau of Narcotics. The CIA considered White’s position ideal, as it gave him unrestricted access to a variety of drugs without suspicion. Under CIA auspices, George White set up ‘safehouses’ in New York and later San Francisco, fully equipped with covert video and audio surveillance equipment. The goal was to study the use of prostitutes for covert intelligence.²¹⁸

“TSS officials wanted to find out everything they could about how to apply sex to spying, and the prostitute project became a general learning and then training ground for CIA carnal operations. After all, states one TSS official, “We did quite a study of prostitutes and their behavior…. At first nobody really knew how to use them. How do you train them? How do you work them? How do you take a woman who is willing to use her body to get money out of a guy to get things which are much more important, like state secrets. I don’t care how beautiful she is—educating the ordinary prostitute up to that level is not a simple task.” – John Marks

In addition to studying the use of prostitutes for clandestine use, the safehouses were used to administer drugs to the unwitting solicitors, after which the various effects would be recorded. At least a couple CIA veterans were willing to discuss the use of these safehouses for a more sinister operation: entrapment. John Marks’ research of the over 20,000 declassified documents into MK-ULTRA shortly after their release in the mid 70’s revealed the following shocking information:

“Gottlieb did not limit his interest to drugs. He and other TSS officials wanted to try out surveillance equipment. CIA technicians quickly installed see-through mirrors and microphones through which eavesdroppers could film, photograph, and record the action. ‘Things go wrong with listening devices and two-way mirrors, so you build these things to find out what works and what doesn’t,’ says a TSS source. ‘If you are going to entrap, you’ve got to give the guy pictures [flagrante delicto] and voice recordings. Once you learn how to do it so that the whole thing looks comfortable, cozy, and safe, then you can transport the technology overseas and use it.’ This TSS man notes that the Agency put to work in the bedrooms of Europe some of the techniques developed in the George White safehouse operation.”²¹⁹

James Keehner, a former CIA psychologist, recalled his involvement in one entrapment case, in which he analyzed a nurse who had ‘offered her body’ for her country:

Keehner noted that he became disillusioned with entrapment cases, but that other officers ‘got their jollies’ from this type of work. Regarding his typical assignment, Keehner stated:

“I was sent to deal with the most negative aspects of the human condition. It was planned destructiveness. First, you’d check to see if you could destroy a man’s marriage. If you could, then that would be enough to put a lot of stress on the individual, to break him down. Then you might start a minor rumor campaign against him. Harass him constantly. Bump his car in traffic. A lot of it is ridiculous, but it may have a cumulative effect.“

Knowing that some officers got their ‘jollies’ from entrapment operations, and that safehouses were installed in the United States, the question “Were entrapment techniques ever used against United States officials or other domestic people of importance?” is logically raised.

“We wanted her to sleep with this Russian… Either the Russian would fall in love with her and defect, or we’d blackmail him. I had to see if she could sleep with him over a period of time and not get involved emotionally. Boy, was she tough!”²²⁰

218 1977 Joint Hearing Before the Select Committee on Intelligence (PDF Warning)

219 John Marks, “The Search for the Manchurian Candidate,” PDF available here

220 Ibid

* * * *

Personality Assessment

Although MK-ULTRA was originally devoted to biological mind control, it quickly evolved into a program dedicated to understanding all aspects of the human psyche. George White’s experiments tested how people reacted to entrapment, and other experiments tested how different types of people responded to alcohol. It is with this context that the CIA contacted Psychologist John Gittinger to become an instrumental part of MK-ULTRA.

Gittinger had developed the Personality Assessment System, a test which would be administered to give fascinating insights into a person’s personality and had distinct variables that separated his work from other known personality tests at the time such as the famous Weschler exam. Like Ewen Cameron, Gittinger received funding through the Human Ecology Society to research what type of personality would be likely to defect from their country, both to target foreign agents and to weed out domestic ones.

At one point, Gittinger traveled to work with George White to use his test on prostitutes and homosexuals to refine his assessment test to figure out what type of sexual orientation someone likely had, and to figure out who had sexually deviant tendencies. One of Gittinger’s colleagues stated that he knew of cases where the Personality Assessment System was used to identify targets for entrapment, both heterosexual and homosexual.²²¹

One particularly useful application of the Personality Assessment System was to identify people who would be easily hypnotized. It has likely been used extensively to hand-pick subjects and employees on sensitive projects within and beyond MK-ULTRA, assessing peoples personalities to discover who would retain secrecy and loyalty.

Interestingly, Gittinger was familiar enough with his test that he was able to observe someone’s behavior and then retroactively apply the attributes to determine their personality type. By observing how a man held his cigarette, handled his alcohol, or interacted with women, Gittinger could profile that person and determine their weaknesses and propensity for exploitation through entrapment or other means.

One logical application of the Personality Assessment System is the ability to assign certain people to a program that required secrecy, by determining how loyal an agent or asset would be to the Agency.

221 John Marks, “The Search for the Manchurian Candidate,” PDF available here

* * * *

Hypnotism

In mainstream culture, hypnotism is viewed as a type of ‘science fiction’, confined to the realm of magic tricks and entertainment. The truth is that hypnotism is very real and used both in mainstream psychology and in military intelligence.

Hypnotism was used by the United States military before the creation of the CIA, during World War II. Psychologist Dr. George H. Estabrooks recalled his involvement in the clandestine program toScience Digest in 1971, in an article titled “Hypnotism Comes of Age”.

“One of the most fascinating but dangerous applications of hypnosis is its use in military intelligence. This is a field with which I am familiar through formulating guidelines for the techniques used by the United States in two world wars.

Communication in war is always a headache. Codes can be broken. A professional spy may or may not stay bought. Your own man may have unquestionable loyalty but his judgment is always open to question.

The “hypnotic courier,” on the other hand, provides a unique solution. I was involved in preparing many subjects for this work during World War II. One successful case involved an Army Service Corps Captain whom we’ll call George Smith. Captain Smith had undergone months of training. He was an excellent subject but did not realize it. I had removed from him, by post hypnotic suggestion, all recollection of ever having been hypnotized.

First I had the Service Corps call the captain to Washington and tell him they needed a report on the mechanical equipment of Division X headquartered in Tokyo. Smith was ordered to leave by jet next morning, pick up the report and return at once. These orders were given him in the waking state. Consciously, that was all he knew, and it was the story he gave his wife and friends.

Then I put him under deep hypnosis, and gave him—orally—a vital message to be delivered directly on his arrival in Japan to a certain colonel—let’s say his name was Brown—of military intelligence. Outside of myself, Colonel Brown was the only person who could hypnotize Captain Smith. This is “locking.” I performed it by saying to the hypnotized Captain: “Until further orders from me, only Colonel Brown and I can hypnotize you. We will use the signal phrase ‘the moon is clear.’ Whenever you hear this phrase from Brown or myself you will pass instantly into deep hypnosis.” When Captain Smith re-awakened, he had no conscious memory of what happened in trance. All that he was aware of was that he must head for Tokyo to pick up the division report.

On arrival there, Smith reported to Brown, who hypnotized him with the signal phrase. Under hypnosis, Smith delivered my message and received one to bring back. Awakened, he was given the division report and returned home by jet. There I hypnotized him once more with the signal phrase, and he spieled off Brown’s answer that had been dutifully tucked away in his unconscious mind. The system is virtually foolproof. As exemplified by the case, the information literally was “locked” in Smith’s unconscious for retrieval by the only two people who knew the combination. The subject had no conscious memory of what happened, so couldn’t spill the beans. No one else could hypnotize him even if they might know the signal phrase…”

“The potential for military intelligence has been nightmarish. During World War II, I worked this technique with a vulnerable Marine lieutenant I’ll call Jones. Under the watchful eye of Marine intelligence I split his personality into Jones A and Jones B. Jones A, once a “normal” working Marine, became entirely different. He talked communist doctrine and meant it. He was welcomed enthusiastically by communist cells, and was deliberately given a dishonorable discharge by the Corps (which was in on the plot) and became a card-carrying party member.

The joker was Jones B, the second personality, formerly apparent in the conscious Marine. Under hypnosis, this Jones had been carefully coached by suggestion. Jones B was the deeper personality, knew all the thoughts of Jones A, was a loyal American and was “imprinted” to say nothing during conscious phases.

All I had to do was hypnotize the whole man, get in touch with Jones B, the loyal American, and I had a pipeline straight into the Communist camp. It worked beautifully for months with this subject, but the technique backfired. While there was no way for an enemy to expose Jones’ dual personality, they suspected it and played the same trick on us later.” – Science Digest, April 1971²²²

It is pretty shocking to see that Estabrooks was willing to completely destroy the life of a marine by relegating his primary personality to an ‘alternate’ that would only appear when accessed through hypnosis. It is more shocking that such an application of hypnotism is even possible. He noted that the potential for military intelligence was nightmarish but felt content that his knowledge was being used for the United States instead of the Nazis or the Russians. Unfortunately, corrupt elements in the United States, namely the CIA, would capitalize on this knowledge for illicit means in the near future.

There are a variety of CIA documents released through the Freedom of Information Act that shed light on their hypnotism activities. One particularly disturbing example is MK-ULTRA document 190691. It describes an experiment where an unnamed CIA official hypnotized two subjects, both 19 year old women. In an awakened state, they expressed deep disgust in the idea of holding a gun, yet when hypnotized, one was willing to grab it and fire at her peer (the gun was unloaded and no one was hurt.) It states:²²³

“[Redacted] was then instructed (having previously expressed a fear of firearms in any fashion) that she would use every method at her disposal to awaken [redacted] (now in a deep hypnotic sleep) and failing in this, she would pick up a pistol nearby and fire it at [redacted]. She was instructed that her rage would be so great she would not hesitate to “kill” [redacted] for failing to awake. [Redacted] carried out these suggestions to the letter, including firing the (unloaded pneumatic) pistol at [redacted] and then proceeding to fall into a deep sleep. After proper suggestions were made, both were awakened and expressed complete amnesia for the entire sequence.”

MK-ULTRA Document 190691

Not only was the CIA officer able to coerce otherwise peaceful subjects into violence, he was able to remove any memories of the event after they ‘woke up’ from the hypnotism.

MK-ULTRA Document 190527

MK-ULTRA Document 190527 reveals that through hypnotic suggestion, one subject was coerced into setting up an incendiary bomb and leaving the device in a bathroom.²²⁴ The document states that even with unforeseen problems in location availability during the hypnotic state, the experiment was:

“…carried off without any difficulty or hesitation on the part of either of the girls… Throughout, their movements were easy and natural, and (bystanders) were, to all intents and purposes, completely unaware of what was taking place although they could clearly observe the movements of [redacted] and [redacted].”

Dr. Estabrooks once noted that only one in five people were susceptible to hypnotism in this manner. True to form, the CIA researched ways to improve to hypnotic susceptibility in their subjects, and found some success by combining techniques with administering drugs. A document titled Continuation of Studies on Hypnosis and Suggestibility states:

“Preliminary clinical research during 1955-56 has yielded promising leads in terms of knowledge of how hypnotizability can be influenced by pharmacological means. Several drugs have been identified that apparently are effective in speeding the induction of a hypnotic state…”²²⁵

The two cited CIA documents describe the unwitting hypnosis of two young women for the use of experimentation. What is the possibility that psychopaths would use this knowledge to exploit women sexually? Perhaps the most disturbing CIA document I have come across is numbered 140393 and details a CIA interview with a professional hypnotist who was asked to give an instructional course in hypnotism to CIA agents. It states:

“On July 2 1951 approximately 1:00 pm the instruction began with [redacted] relating to the student some of his sexual experiences. [Redacted] stated that he constantly used hypnotism as a means of inducing young girls to engage in sexual intercourse with him. [Redacted], a performer in [redacted] orchestra was forced to engage in sexual intercourse with [redacted] while under the influence of hypnotism. [Redacted] stated that he first put her into a hypnotic trance and then suggested to her that he was her husband and she desired sexual intercourse with him. [Redacted] further stated that many times while going home he would use hypnotic suggestion to have a girl turn around and talk to him and suggest sexual intercourse to him and that as a result of these suggestions he spent approximately five nights a week away from his home engaging in sexual intercourse.”²²⁶

It is nothing short of terrifying to read how interested the CIA was in methods of rape. The fact that this was beyond any application to intelligence is an afterthought. The document finishes by describing how the student of the hypnotism instructor was able to successfully use his newly-learned techniques on new subjects, indicating that hypnotism was able to spread throughout the ranks of the CIA relatively effortlessly.

When Operation Bluebird first began, marking the beginnings of research into hypnosis, one early document revealed a surprising goal:

“Can we “condition” by post-hypnotic suggestion agency employees (or persons of interest to this agency) to prevent them from giving information to any unauthorized source or for committing any act on behalf of a foreign or domestic enemy?”²²⁷

This raises the distinct and disturbing possibility that the act of hypnotizing agency members for the purpose of altering their behavior became a common practice at the CIA under MK-ULTRA, with the power of what suggestions to induce at the hands of only two psychopathic men.

222 Science Digest, “Hypnotism Comes of Age,” April 1971

223 Declassified CIA document 190691. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

224 Declassified CIA document 190527. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

225 Declassified CIA document 17441. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

226 Declassified CIA document 140393. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

227 Declassified CIA document 140401. See also excellent summary of declassified CIA documents.

* * * *

Conclusion

Upon MK-ULTRA becoming public knowledge in 1971, the CIA was quick to claim that the program was halted due to a lack of production. The available evidence clearly shows that this is a lie. From the documents that survived Director Helm’s destruction order, we can already see the potential for a ‘Manchurian candidate’: a mind controlled assassin.

So what happened to MK-ULTRA? 14 year CIA veteran Victor Marchetti has stated in numerous interviews that the claim MK-ULTRA was halted was merely a cover-story, and that the operation went completely black, in other words, research continued at the highest level of secrecy.²²⁸

Is it possible that academic research into hypnosis and other organic forms of mind control have been deliberately marginalized from mainstream entertainment, media and academics in order to keep its potential use within a military-industrial complex a secret? After all, MK-ULTRA researcher Dr. Ewen Cameron became the president of the World Psychiatric Association in 1961 and also served as presidents of the Canadian and American Psychiatric Associations.²²⁹

It is important to reiterate that not only does the available evidence of MK-ULTRA comprise a very small portion of the documents that were created, but many of the experiments were never recorded in the first place. The operation was presided over by only two individuals who had a complete knowledge of the operations. Not even the Director of the CIA had full access. When John F. Kennedy appointed John McCone as the new director in the wake of the Bay of Pigs fiasco, Richard Helms declined to inform him about the more sensitive MK- ULTRA operations, such as George White’s safehouses.²³⁰

Ultimately, the goal of MK-ULTRA was not to find the ‘holy grail’ of mind control but to map out a complete knowledge of human nature and the human mind, and then find ways to exploit it. This was done on both individual and group levels. We have no idea how much was accomplished towards this goal, or how much more developed the mind control research has gotten in the 50 years that have passed since the available documents were last issued. After all, if this is what the CIA was able to accomplish in the 1950’s, what are they capable of today?

228 Telegraph,”Histories Greatest Conspiracy Theories”

229 Research from Historian John Simpkin, available here.

230 Church Committee’s Assassination report, pp. 102-3

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. What kind of experiments were detailed in the documents that were destroyed after Director Helm’s orders?

2. What kind of experiments were never recorded and why did they require such a high level of secrecy?

3. Do any recent instances of terrorism or assassinations sound similar to the documented instances of hypnotically induced susceptibility to carry out acts of violence?

4. What kind of power does mind control represent in the hands of a psychopath?

5. How widespread was the entrapment program and is it possible that it ended up targeting U.S. Politicians? Military leaders? Businessmen?

6. What is responsible for the complete lack of knowledge of MK-ULTRA among the public?

7. What was the purpose of associating trauma through electro-shock and other means with mind control?

8. What new means of mind control have emerged with new technology?

* * * *

Chapter VI: Operation Gladio

“In Europe’s new order, they are the spies who never quite came in from the cold, foot soldiers in an underground guerrilla network with one stated mission: To fight an enemy that most Europeans believe no longer exists.

Theirs is a tale of secret arms caches and exotic code names, of military stratagems and political intrigues.

At best, their tale is no more than a curious footnote to the cold war. The question is if, at worst, it could be the key to unsolved terrorism dating back two decades…

The focus of the inquiry is a clandestine operation code-named Gladio, created decades ago to arm and train resistance fighters in case the Soviet Union and its Warsaw Pact allies invaded.

All this week, there have been disclosures of similar organizations in virtually all Western European countries, including those that do not belong to the North Atlantic Treaty Organization.” – New York Times²³¹

How far would the United States go to prevent the spread of communism in Western Europe? Especially considering the constant false information provided by Reinhard Gehlen and his Organization indicating that a Soviet invasion was imminent? The answer is Operation Gladio: The CIA and NATO campaign to create, arm and fund radical right wing ‘stay behind’ organizations that would fight communism to the death.

When the Soviet invasion never happened, these organizations created networks with politicians and within the black market, and turned their goals towards preventing the rise of leftist political movements, often resorting to terrorism to create domestic tension, causing citizens to turn towards increasingly fascist governments to provide protection. Today, this process is known as the ‘Strategy of Tension’.

231 New York Times, “Evolution in Europe: Italy Discloses its Web of Cold War Guerillas.” November 6, 1990

* * * *

Italy

It was Judge Felice Casson who first dredged up the evidence for state sponsored terrorism, while browsing the archives of the Italian military secret service.²³² In a BBC documentary on Operation Gladio, Casson described the operations as an effort…

“to create tension within the country to promote conservative, reactionary social and political tendencies. While this strategy was being implemented, it was necessary to protect those behind it because evidence implicating them was being discovered. Witnesses withheld information to cover right-wing extremists.”²³³

Casson points to a 1972 car bombing in Peteano that killed three paramilitary police and was blamed on leftists, after which 200 Communists were immediately arrested. He found that there were no police investigations of the scene, and the official report was a forgery.²³⁴ In fact, it was perpetrated by a right-wing terrorist named Vincenzo Vinciguerra,²³⁵ operating under Gladio orders, who later confessed to the crime.

Vinciguerra’s testimony reveals that it was easy to escape and remain hidden because everyone in the Italian security apparatus shared his anti-Communist convictions.²³⁶ His testimony further revealed “a secret organisation, a super-organisation with a network of communications, arms, and explosives, and men trained to use them.”²³⁷ Years later, in prison, he would claim “I say that every single outrage that followed from 1969 fitted into a single organised matrix.”²³⁸ Nearly 2,000 people would die from political murder or acts of terrorism over this period of time.

When ex-Prime Minister Andreotti finally testified in 1990, he revealed that arms and equipment were provided by the CIA and placed in 139 underground caches across the country. General Giandelio Maletti, a former head of Italian counterintelligence, in March 2001 confirmed the CIA involvement. He stated that after the Piazza Fontana bombing in 1969, pieces of a bomb were planted in a leftist editors villa in order to blame the communists. He stated:

“The CIA, following the directives of its government, wanted to create an Italian nationalism capable of halting what it saw as a slide to the left, and, for this purpose, it may have made use of right-wing terrorism.”²³⁹

232 Judge Felice Casson’s Wikipedia article

233 Operation Gladio, a 1992 BBC production, watch it here.

234 Historian Daniel Ganser, eminent Gladio researcher, in his book NATO’s Secret Armies, page 3, available in PDF here. Ganser is the eminent authority on Operation Gladio and has done tremendous work in synthesizing the various evidence from nearly a dozen different languages into one source. This book is a must-read to gain a full understanding of Operation Gladio.

235 Vincenzo Vinciguerra’s Wikipedia article

236 Daniel Ganser, in a paper published in the Whitehead Journal of Diplomacy and International Relations,page 72, available in PDF here.

237 Ibid.

238 Ganser’s NATO’s Secret Armies, page 8.

239 Ganser’s Whitehead Journal of Diplomacy and International Relations, page 73.

* * * *

Turkey

Another Gladio hotspot was Turkey. During the Cold War, Turkey shared a third of the total borders with the Soviet bloc and maintained the largest standing army in Europe, and the second in NATO after the United States. In 1952, a stay-behind army was organized under the codename ‘Counter-Guerrilla’.

“On November 3 (1996), a truck crashed into a Mercedes Benz in Susurluk, ninety miles south of Istanbul, and killed three Turkish passengers: a fugitive heroin smuggler and hitman, a former high-ranking police officer, and a former ‘Miss Cinema.’ The lone survivor was a right-wing member of parliament. In the car’s trunk, police found a forged passport, police identification papers, ammunition, silencers, and machine guns.

Abdullah Catli, the fugitive heroin smuggler, had escaped from a Swiss prison. The dead beauty queen, Gonca Uz, was his girlfriend. The police officer was Huseyin Kocadag, head of a Turkish police academy and a former Istanbul deputy police chief who reportedly organized hit squads in the southeast that kill Kurdish guerrillas and their supporters. The survivor, Sedat Bucak, a member of parliament from the conservative True Path Party, is reportedly in charge of 2,000 Kurdish mercenaries paid by the government to fight Kurdish guerrillas.

The car crash has created a sensation in Turkey and has led parliament to hold hearings on the ties linking the True Path Party, the police, and thugs like Abdullah Catli. Newspapers in Turkey are making connections between what they are calling the “state gang” and a secret paramilitary force that for decades has attacked the left…

The United States funded these stay-behind groups for decades. Even though there was no Soviet occupation, some of the groups did take up arms against left-wing dissidents in their own countries. Some descendants of these groups are still at it, especially in Turkey.

Abdullah Catli was one of those.

“The accident unveiled the dark liaisons within the state,” former prime minister Bulent Ecevit told parliament in December. Now leader of a small opposition social-democratic party, Ecevit knows a lot about those liaisons. He first told me about them – and the American connection – back in 1990, when I interviewed him in his Ankara office.” –The Progressive²⁴⁰

Bulent Ecevit, five time Turkish prime minister, who is cited in the above quote, declared that the Taksim Square massacre was a Gladio operation, where half a million citizens had rallied. It was organized by trade unions, and the shooting lasted for 20 minutes while a thousand policemen in attendance did not intervene. About 40 people were killed, and though none of the perpetrators were caught, 500 demonstrators were detained. The massacre occurred during a broader wave of political violence.²⁴¹

The U.S. State Department in its 1995 Human Rights report noted that:

“Prominent credible human rights organizations, Kurdish leaders, and local Kurds asserted that the government acquiesces in, or even carries out, the murder of civilians… Human rights groups reported the widespread and credible belief that a Counter-Guerrilla group associated with the security forces had carried out at least some ‘mystery killings'”.²⁴²

American journalist Lucy Komisar, when asking U.S. officials about investigating the human rights reports, was told “That’s classified.” The Turkish military would likewise block all investigations in their country.²⁴³

There is evidence of Gladio operatives extensively operating torture campaigns for political purposes. For example, Talhat Turhan, former Turkey General, survived torture at the hands of special forces. He was told “…I was now ‘in the hands of a Counter Guerrilla unit operating under the high command of the Army outside the constitution and the laws.’ They told me that they ‘considered me as their prisoner of war and that I was sentenced to death.’”²⁴⁴

Much of the violence was directed at the Kurdish minority. In 1984 the Counter-Guerrillas were behind the brutal crackdown that would kill and torture thousands over the next five years. Among other operations, Counter-Guerrillas would dress up as PKK members (A Kurdish political party) and attacked villages, raping and executing people randomly.²⁴⁵

The political violence in Turkey, with Gladio operatives responsible to at least a moderate extent, paved the way for the series of military coups that have occurred in the country. A 1996 New York Times article notes that:

“evidence suggests that officially sanctioned criminality may have reached levels that few had imagined…

One of Turkey’s most prominent pro-Kurdish politicians, Guven Ozata, said the car crash and its aftermath had convinced him that state-sponsored death squads were behind many of the estimated 3,500 unsolved killings that have been committed in the southeastern part of the country in the last decade. Most of the victims had been suspected of sympathizing with separatist Kurdish causes.

”These gangs have a direct link with mystery killings,” Mr. Ozata said at a news conference. ”This is no longer a hypothesis or a guess. It is a reality acknowledged by government officials.”

Several politicians and others who are calling for investigations into the government’s relationship with criminal gangs believe that the gangs used their official ties as cover for involvement in Turkey’s lucrative heroin-smuggling trade. They suspect that senior officials were engaged in the trade or tolerated it as a way of repaying gangs that killed at their behest.” – New York Times²⁴⁶

The evidence of Gladio operations in Turkey reveal another important link: The collusion between paramilitary forces and drug traffickers. At the time (and to this day), Turkey served as a major hub in the smuggling of drugs into Western Europe, from the Southeast Asian ‘Golden Triangle’ and later the Middle East.

It is likely that drugs served as a significant source of funding for these decentralized operations and was the catalyst for a bond between the state and the criminal underworld that ensured massive corruption in the country that exists to this day. After all, we know that the Gehlen Organization was involved in the black market in the area to raise extra funds for their intelligence operations. It seems that this practice spread throughout the web of ‘stay-behind’ armies financed and armed by the CIA and NATO.

240 The Progressive, “Turkey´s Terrorists: A CIA Legacy Lives On,” April 1, 1997

241 Ganser´s Whitehead Journal of Diplomacy and International Relations, page 73

242 Ganser’s NATO’s Secret Army, page 20

243 Ibid.

244 Ganser´s Whitehead Journal of Diplomacy and International Relations, page 74

245 Ganser’s NATO’s Secret Army, page 240

246 New York Times, “Scandal Links Turkish Aides to Death, Drugs and Terror”, December 10, 1996

* * * *

Greece

One of the countries that suffered the most from the Cold War terrorism groups was Greece, the country with perhaps the most significant propensity for the rise of a natural leftist coalition. Former CIA agent and Gladio whistleblower Philip Agee claimed that:

“The Greek-American CIA officer recruited several groups of Greek citizens for what the CIA called ‘a nucleus for rallying a citizen army against the threat of a leftist coup’ … Each of the several groups was trained and equipped to act as an autonomous guerrilla unit, capable of mobilizing and carrying on guerrilla warfare with minimal or no outside direction.”²⁴⁷

These groups were equipped with automatic weapons and small mountain mortars stashed in underground caches throughout the country.²⁴⁸

The group was involved with the 1967 coup, where leftists were widely reported to have large leads in the polls. As NATO orders were to prevent any type of leftist ‘insurgency’, the group took over the Greece Defense Ministry, rolled into Athens, took control of communications centers, Parliament, the Royal Palace, and arrested over 10,000 people, many of whom were tortured.²⁴⁹

247 Len Scott, “Intelligence, Crisis and Security.” Excerpt available here.

248 Ganser´s Whitehead Journal of Diplomacy and International Relations, page 77

249 Ibid.

* * * *

Conclusion

Although the CIA and NATO have steadfastly refused to acknowledge the existence of Gladio, giving them deniability from ever having to disclose documents related to the operation, the existence of these fascist and violent underground networks has been acknowledged by the governments of nearly every NATO country. Furthermore, official documents in German, Dutch, French and Italian confirming the network, its organization and practices have been declassified.²⁵⁰

Operation Gladio is not just some ancient history. Italian Prime Minister Giulio Andreotti confirmed that the last coordination meeting he was aware of was held in 1990.²⁵¹ It has to be noted that this was a period of time where terrorism was evolving, moving towards the widespread radical Islamic terror that bombards our television screens daily, just three years before the first World Trade Center bombing and two years after the creation of Al-Qaeda. At the same time the geopolitical strategies of the United States were moving away from Europe and towards the Middle East. Unfortunately, the available information on Operation Gladio raises more questions than it answers.

250 Dozens of these documents are hosted here.

251 Ganser’s NATO’s Secret Army, page 1

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. Knowing that the last acknowledged Gladio meeting was in 1990, can we say with any certainty that the program ever ended?

2. How many people involved with Gladio are still operating in the CIA and other agencies?

3. Seeing that the ‘Strategy of Tension’ proved to be an effective tool, in what other instances has it been implemented?

4. Is there currently a ‘Gladio B‘ in operation in the Middle East, as former FBI translatorSibel Edmonds asserts?

5. Are the criminal alliances that formed during Gladio in places such as Turkey still in effect today?

6. How did the ‘stay-behind’ organizations affect domestic politics in ways other than terrorism?

7. Is the ongoing assassination campaign in Iraq, discussed in the chapter ‘The War on Terror is a Fraud’, a part of an evolved Gladio campaign?

Note: Feeling overwhelmed with this material? Take an inspiration break in our Inspiration Center.

* * * *

Chapter VII: Operation Mockingbird

“About a third of the whole CIA budget went to media propaganda operations… We’re talking about hundreds of millions of dollars a year just for that… close to a billion dollars are being spent every year by the United States on secret propaganda.” – Testimony of William Schapp to Congress²⁵²

In 1948, the United States began the Marshall Plan, an initiative to help the devastated Europe recover from the War. The CIA decided to siphon funds to create the Office of Policy Coordination, which would become the covert action branch of the Agency.²⁵³ It was under this program thatOperation Mockingbird, a domestic propaganda campaign aimed at promoting the views of the CIA within the media, began. From the onset, Operation Mockingbird was one of the most sensitive of the CIA’s operations, with recruitment of journalists and training of intelligence officers for propaganda purposes usually undertaken by Director Allen Dulles himself or his direct peers.²⁵⁴

It is a false belief that the CIA ‘infiltrated’ unwitting media institutions. The recruitment of journalists was frequently done with complicity from top management and ownership. Former CIA Director William Colby claimed during the Church Committee investigative hearings, “Lets go to the managements. They were witting.” Among the organizations that would lend their help to the propaganda efforts was the New York Times, Newsweek, Associated Press, and the Miami Herald. Providing cover to CIA agents was a part of the New York Times policy, set by their late publisher, Arthur Hays Salzberger.²⁵⁵

The investigative committee of Frank Church, officially titled “Select Committee to Study Governmental Operations with Respect to Intelligence Activities”, uncovered a lot of evidence concerning Operation Mockingbird and came to the conclusion that:

“The CIA currently maintains a network of several hundred foreign individuals around the world who provide intelligence for the CIA and at times attempt to influence opinion through the use of covert propaganda. These individuals provide the CIA with direct access to a large number of newspapers and periodicals, scores of press services and news agencies, radio and television stations, commercial book publishers, and other foreign media outlets.”²⁵⁶

Carl Bernstein, the reporter famous for his excellent investigation into the Watergate scandal, wrote that:

“(Joseph) Alsop is one of more than 400 American journalists who in the past twenty-five years have secretly carried out assignments for the Central Intelligence Agency, according to documents on file at CIA headquarters. Some of these journalists’ relationships with the Agency were tacit; some were explicit. There was cooperation, accommodation and overlap. Journalists provided a full range of clandestine services—from simple intelligence gathering to serving as go betweens with spies in Communist countries.

Reporters shared their notebooks with the CIA. Editors shared their staffs. Some of the journalists were Pulitzer Prize winners, distinguished reporters who considered themselves ambassadors without portfolio for their country. Most were less exalted: foreign correspondents who found that their association with the Agency helped their work; stringers and freelancers who were as interested in the derring-do of the spy business as in filing articles; and, the smallest category, full-time CIA employees masquerading as journalists abroad. In many instances, CIA documents show, journalists were engaged to perform tasks for the CIA with the consent of the managements of America’s leading news organizations.”²⁵⁷

While a majority of Mockingbird operations were overseas, the goal was to have important, hard-hitting stories to be circulated in the American press. Relationships with major United States media institutions certainly helped with this goal. Bernstein lists The New York Times, CBSand Time inc. as the most productive relationships the agency cultivated. They also created front organizations overseas who publicly maintained an appearance of free press but privately were operated by the agency. An example of this is the Rome Daily American, which was 40% owned by the CIA for three decades.²⁵⁸

Another strategy was developing relationships with major media owners who were known to harbor right-wing views, such as William Paley of CBS, and then passing on information of journalists, actors and screenwriters who harbored left-wing views. Information was also passed on to friendly congressmen such as Joseph McCarthy. These men and women would then be blacklisted from the industry. Lee J. Cobb was one such actor who was blacklisted, and recalled his experience:

“When the facilities of the government of the United States are drawn on an individual it can be terrifying. The blacklist is just the opening gambit – being deprived of work. Your passport is confiscated. That’s minor. But not being able to move without being tailed is something else. After a certain point it grows to implied as well as articulated threats, and people succumb. My wife did, and she was institutionalized. In 1953 the HCUA (House UnAmerican Activities Committee) did a deal with me. I was pretty much worn down. I had no money. I couldn’t borrow. I had the expenses of taking care of the children. Why am I subjecting my loved ones to this? If it’s worth dying for, and I am just as idealistic as the next fellow. But I decided it wasn’t worth dying for, and if this gesture was the way of getting out of the penitentiary I’d do it. I had to be employable again.”²⁵⁹

The CIA went as far as to write scripts for Hollywood. One interesting example is the funding of the movie version of Animal Farm in 1954, a book written just less than a decade earlier by George Orwell which enjoyed large commercial success. The problem for the CIA was that Orwell was a socialist, and his book attacked both capitalism and communism. To avoid this conflict, the CIA changed the ending of the Hollywood version to portray capitalism in a more positive light.²⁶⁰

Domestic surveillance was also used on journalists who had published classified material. In one example, a physical surveillance post was set up at a Hilton Hotel in view of the office ofWashington Post writer Michael Getler.²⁶¹ The operation defied the CIA’s charter, which specifically prohibits domestic spying. The operation was directed towards numerous members of the Washington press corp, and was signed off by John F. Kennedy himself, in coordination with CIA director John McCone.²⁶²

One CIA document states: “Get books published or distributed abroad without revealing any U.S. Influence, by covertly subsidizing foreign publicans or booksellers… Get books published for operational reasons, regardless of commercial viability”. The Church Committee concluded that over 1000 books were published under this directive.²⁶³

Some investigative journalists have claimed that Operation Mockingbird did not end in 1976 as the CIA claims. For example, in 1998, researcher Steve Kangas claimed that conservative billionaire Richard Mellon Scaife, who ran ‘Forum World Features’, a foreign news organization, was a CIA asset and used the organization to disseminate propaganda for circulation in the United States.²⁶⁴Kangas ended up dead with a bullet hole in his head, in the office of Richard Scaife. It was ruled a suicide, although there were discrepancies in the police report and the autopsy.²⁶⁵

The Church Committee’s conclusion accurately reflects the problems associated with Operation Mockingbird:

“In examining the CIA’s past and present use of the U.S. media, the Committee finds two reasons for concern. The first is the potential, inherent in covert media operations, for manipulating or incidentally misleading the American public. The second is the damage to the credibility and independence of a free press which may be caused by covert relationships with the U.S. journalists and media organizations.”²⁶⁶

While it is deplorable for citizens of countries to be subjected to a state-owned media, at least they can be aware of the biases and filter information accordingly. We have been taught a lie from birth that the U.S. press is free from government meddling. In a situation where the manipulation is completely covert, the American public has been left unaware of the propaganda they have been ingesting for decades.

252 Testimony available here.

253 Sallie Pasani “The CIA and the Marshall Plan,” excerpt available here.

254 Rolling Stone Magazine, “The CIA and the Media,” October 20, 1977

255 Ibid.

256 Final Report of the Select Committee to Study Government Operations With Respect to Intelligence Activities. April 1976.

257 Rolling Stone Magazine, “The CIA and the Media,” October 20, 1977

258 Wikipedia article on the Rome Daily American

259 Wikipedia article on Lee J. Cobb

260 John Simkin, “Operation Mockingbird.”

261 New York Times, “Project Mockingbird: Spying on Reporters,” June 26, 2007

262 Ibid.

263 Final Report of the Select Committee to Study Government Operations With Respect to Intelligence Activities. April 1976.

264 Steve Kangas, “A Timeline of CIA Atrocities.”

265 John Simkin, “Steve Kangas.”

266 Final Report of the Select Committee to Study Government Operations With Respect to Intelligence Activities. April 1976.

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. Why were the owners and management of large media institutions so willing to participate in a program that violated their journalistic integrity?

2. Has the increasingly consolidated media industry made it easier for news to be manipulated to fit ‘the agenda’ discussed in the One Party State?

3. Have MK-ULTRA entrapment or mind control techniques ever been used to target the press?

* * * *

Chapter VIII: COINTELPRO

“Between 1965 and 1975, the FBI opened more than 500,000 intelligence files on more than one million Americans, according to a Congressional report…. Among the Bureau’s targets: Martin Luther King and the civil rights movement, anti-Vietnam War Groups, and the underground press.” – Center for Investigative Reporting²⁶⁷

“Purpose of counterintelligence action is to disrupt the BPP [Black Panther Party] and it is immaterial whether facts exist to substantiate the charge.” – J. Edgar Hoover²⁶⁸

J. Edgar Hoover issued directives for COINTELPRO, a codename for Counter Intelligence Program, in 1956. The original intent was to monitor the Communist Party USA but quickly expanded its scope to infiltrate and marginalize a variety of groups such as the American Indian Movement, the Student Nonviolent Coordinating Committee, and the Black Panthers, as well as targeting high profile individuals such as Martin Luther King, Jr.

The FBI’s stated motivation was “protecting national security, preventing violence, andmaintaining the existing social and political order.“²⁶⁹

They used harassment, wiretapping, psychological warfare, propaganda, and assassinations among other techniques to achieve their goals.

267 Context available here.

268 From a 1970 FBI document, available here.

269 Excerpt from the Church Committee, available here, page 3

* * * *

Fred Hampton

On December 4th, 1969, the Chicago Police Department and FBI raided an apartment housing members of the Black Panther Party. At 4:45 am, the heavily armed police stormed the apartment, killing Panther member Mark Clark immediately, who was serving a security duty. Clark fired his shotgun, the only shot fired by the Panthers that day, while the police and FBI would end up shooting 98 times.²⁷⁰ Forensics and firearms experts determined that Clark’s shot was fired from very near the floor, indicating that Clark had already sustained grave injuries.

The raid team would then assault the room of Fred Hampton, a rising leader in the Panther movement. Police would fire twice at Hampton, who was lying next to his pregnant girlfriend, hitting his shoulder. Court transcripts revealed the following conversation took place:²⁷¹

“That’s Fred Hampton.”

“Is he dead?… Bring him out.” “He’s barely alive.

“He’ll make it.

Two more shots were fired, point blank at Hampton’s head.

“He’s good and dead now.”

<p “=””>Crime Scene from Fred Hampton’s Bedroom

Over a dozen more Panthers residing in the apartment would be wounded, beaten, and then charged with attempted murder of police officers. The next day, the media largely defended the FBI’s actions. The Chicago Tribune published photos showing holes purported to be from bullets fired by the Panthers, but forensics would later reveal these holes to have been made by nails.²⁷²

Documents released by the Freedom of Information Act include a sketch of Hampton’s apartment drawn by an FBI informant, used by police and FBI in the assassination. The informant received $300 from the FBI for providing the information.²⁷³

The FBI had tried other methods before resorting to assassination, including sending a bogus letter to a rival Chicago gang leader in hopes of provoking a violent retaliation which read:

“Brother Jeff: I’ve spent some time with some Panther friends on the west side lately and I know whats been going on. The brothers that run the Panthers blame you for blocking their thing and there’s supposed to be a hit out for you. I’m not a Panther, or a Ranger, just black. From what I see these Panthers are out for themselves, not black people. I think you ought to know what their (sic) up to, I know what I’d do if I was you. You might here from me again. Signed, A Black Brother You Don’t Know.”²⁷⁴

The use of bogus letters for sabotage and attempting to provoke violence was widely used by the FBI throughout COINTELPRO.

Why was Fred Hampton targeted? He was a rising leader in the Black Panther Party and was in the process of uniting various gang, including the Puerto Rican ‘Young Lords’ and the Caucasian ‘Young Patriots’ into a political coalition. He had the potential to drastically change the political landscape of Chicago by channeling the youth unrest that had previously been directed against other gangs and instead direct it at the political establishment to fight against police corruption and to generate socially constructive energies.

This type of action was directly antagonistic to one of the primary directives of COINTELPRO put forth by J. Edgar Hoover himself, which read:²⁷⁵

“1. Prevent the coalition of militant black nationalist groups.”

The same document also contained another relevant directive:²⁷⁶

“Prevent the rise of a ‘messiah’”

Fred Hampton had the charisma to unite large groups of young men and the attitude of social welfare and community development that had the potential to gain the support of the broader progressive community. His assassination prevented his career from escalating to these heights.

270 Ward Churchill, “COINTELPRO Papers,” page 140. PDF available here. A truly astounding book that draws heavily on official documents provided by the FBI. A ‘must read’.

271 Wikipedia page on Fred Hampton.

272 Chicago Tribune, “The Black Panther Raid and the death of Fred Hampton,” December 4, 1969

273 “Cointelpro Papers” page 160

274 “Cointelpro Papers,” page 159

275 Ibid.

276 The Guardian, “Preventing the rise of a ‘messiah‘,” April 4, 2008

* * * *

Subverting the Black Panther Party

The FBI waged a wildly successful campaign against the Black Panther Party throughout the ’60s and ’70s. By the late ’60s, the Black Panther Party was the most prominent African American political force in the United States. They advocated a 10 point socialist program for black self-determination, provided free food and healthcare to communities, fought against hard drugs, and formed legal armed street patrols to deter violence from the KKK and other antagonistic organizations. They also advocated for community control of police, schools and other institutions. Today, these points are largely ignored in favor of the racist caricature promoted by the Bureau. The operations the FBI took to subvert the Panthers is truly astounding.

For example, there is the Black Panther coloring book, created by the FBI and distributed by Bureau informants to black children in an attempt to marginalize the Party within the black community.²⁷⁷ It is directly related to Hoover’s directive:

“4. Prevent militant black nationalist groups and leaders from gaining respectability”

The goal was not to influence the children of these communities, but to marginalize the Panthers within the white community. The coloring book aimed to do just that, and would certainly be shocking to anyone who saw it. Once marginalized, the public would support increasingly repressive policies against the Panthers and their leadership, such as the Fred Hampton assassination.

To J. Edgar Hoover and the FBI, it did not matter what the activities of the Black Panther Party consisted of. In 1969, an FBI special agent sent Hoover a memo detailing how his investigation of the Panthers has only turned up pacifist activities such as feeding breakfast to children.²⁷⁸ Hoover shot back a memo saying that the Agent’s career ambitions were directly related to supplying Hoover with information supporting his view that the Panthers were “… a violence prone organization seeking to overthrow the government by revolutionary means.”²⁷⁹

To prevent the unification of the Black Panther Party and the Student Nonviolent Coordinating Committee, popularly known as SNCC, the FBI resorted to fostering splits between the leadership of the two organizations. The FBI targeted Stokely Carmichael by using a technique known as ‘bad jacket’: they forged documents indicating that Carmichael was a CIA informant.²⁸⁰ It worked.

The FBI also had the policy of arresting Panther members for any reason, even just on suspicion of crime without evidence, for the purpose of exhausting the Party’s funds to pay bonds. The Panther’s attorney said in 1970:

“In a period of two years — December, 1967 to December, 1969 — the Black Panther Party has expended in bail-bond premiums alone — just the premiums, that is, money that will never be returned — a sum in excess of $200,000! How many breakfasts or lunches for hungry children, how much medical attention sorely needed in the ghetto communities would that $200,000 have furnished? In the same two-year period, twenty-eight Panthers were killed.”²⁸¹

In instances where dozens of Panthers were arrested, the bond requirements were too high to pay and members sat in jail for weeks, or even months, a common COUNTELPRO tactic used against other groups as well. By 1974, the Black Panther Party had essentially collapsed under the weight of ruthless harassment.

277 The Coloring Book is hosted in various places, it is available here at NotreDame.edu

278 Memo available here.

279 Ibid.

280 “COINTELPRO Papers,” page 147

281 Ibid, page 164

* * * *

Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr.

In 1957, the FBI targeted the Southern Christian Leadership Conference as a “likely target for communist infiltration”.²⁸² The nature of the group was entirely non-violent and focused on organizing the southern black vote. It was founded by Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. and several other southern black ministers. By 1964, Dr. King had given his ‘I have a dream speech’ and had emerged as a preeminent civil rights leader and had also began to address social change that transcended racial issues. At this point, the FBI had marked King as a clear threat to the ‘established order’.Agent William C. Sullivan committed to writing:

“We must mark [King] now, if we have not before, as the most dangerous Negro in the future of this Nation from the standpoint of communism, the Negro, and national security… it maybe unrealistic to limit [our actions against King] to legalistic proofs that would stand up in court or before Congressional Committees.”²⁸³

When it was announced that King would win the Nobel Prize, the FBI compiled an audio tape consisting of various fragments of conversations from King’s tapped phones, bugged offices and hotel rooms. It was purported to demonstrate that King was a sexual deviant. It was sent to King with an anonymous note stating that it would be released to the press unless he committed suicide prior to receiving the award.²⁸⁴ When King failed to reply, FBI Associate Director Cartha DeLoach offered the contents of the tape to various news institutions, including Newsweek, but the reporters nearly universally declined to report on the story.

Martin Luther King Jr. into suicide with anonymous note,” January 20, 2014

On April 24, 1968, Dr. King was assassinated. Although public memory has largely forgotten, King was in the process of organizing the ‘Poor Peoples Campaign’, aimed at uniting poor people of all races to rally for social change. It is likely that if King had not died, the campaign would have been wildly successful. The campaign also represented everything that COINTELPRO had been dedicated to prevent. Although there is no complete proof that the FBI was involved with the assassination, the jury of a 1999 Memphis civil trial came to the conclusion that James Earl Ray did not kill King, and that the real culprit was ‘government agencies’.²⁸⁵

282 “COINTELPRO Papers,” Page 116

283 Ibid. Page 118

284 The Daily Mail, “’You are a colossal fraud. There’s only one thing left for you to do’: How the FBI tried to blackmail

285 New York Times, “Memphis Jury Sees Conspiracy in Martin Luther King’s Killing,” December 9, 1999

* * * *

American Indian Movement

“They [the Indians] are a conquered nation, and when you are conquered, the people you are conquered by dictate your future. This is a basic philosophy of mine. If I’m part of a conquered nation, I’ve got to yield to authority… [The FBI must function as] a colonial police force.” – Assistant Special Agent in Charge Norman Zigrossi²⁸⁶

AIM, the American Indian Movement, began in the ’60s as activism focused on preventing the further depredation of Indian lands and resources. As the movement rose to prominence, the FBI marked them as an ‘extremist organization’ to target.²⁸⁷ One document released under the Freedom of Information Act advocates that: “local police put [AIM] leaders under close scrutiny, and arrest them on every possible charge until they could no longer make bail.”²⁸⁸

During a presentation by members of the Congressional Black Caucus to the UN Human Rights Commissioner, it was alleged that virtually every known leader of AIM had been imprisoned in state or federal prisons, some repeatedly. Russell Means, for example, was charged with 37 counts but not one has held up in court.²⁸⁹ It was later revealed that the FBI had infiltrated Mean’s defense team but was still unable to pin their charges against him.

In 1973, thousands of Native Americans from reservations across the West had gathered at Wounded Knee at the Pine Ridge reservation to simultaneously commemorate the 1890 massacre and protest the political corruption of tribal president Dick Wilson, who had received $62,000 from the Bureau of Indian Affairs and was using it to fund a private force that suppressed opposition and often resorted to murder.²⁹⁰

The force designated themselves “Guardians of the Oglala Nation”, abbreviated as GOONS. Attempts to impeach Wilson, who was responsible for years of political violence, had failed. The FBI considered the occupation an act of treason and began a siege of AIM members, in coordination with US Marshalls, agents from the BIA and the GOONS of Dick Wilson. Wilson bluntly declared in a speech that “AIM will die at Wounded Knee”.²⁹¹

According to Historian Rex Weyler, who obtained documents subpoenaed from the Pentagon, the U.S. Marshall Service:

“…directed the employment of 17 APCs [armored personnel carriers], 130,000 rounds of M-16 ammunition, 41,000 rounds of M-40 high explosive, as well as helicopters, Phantom jets, and personnel. Military officers, supply sergeants, maintenance technicians, chemical officers, and medical teams remained on duty throughout the 71 day siege, all working in civilian clothes [to conceal their unconstitutional involvement in this “civil disorder”]”²⁹²

All of this was on site at Pine Ridge during the 71 day standoff, during which AIM demanded the removal of Wilson from office, the GOONs disbanded, and the military presence removed. By the end, hundreds of thousands of rounds were fired at AIM positions , two AIM members were killed, 14 seriously injured, and eight ‘disappeared’. In the 36 months that proceeded the end of the Pine Ridge standoff, more than 60 AIM members died violently on or near Pine Ridge.²⁹³

The Civil Rights Commission revealed that AIM was right to feel aggrieved during the occupation of Pine Ridge: The FBI had been complicit in rigging the 1974 Pine Ridge elections against AIM members.²⁹⁴

286 Ward Churchill, “Agents of Repression.” Excerpt available here.

287 Documents available here.

288 “The COINTEPRO Papers,” page 280

289 The Guardian, “Russell Means obituary,” November 1, 2012

290 A Presentation to the United Nations Human Rights Committee by members of the Congressional Black Caucus, available here.

291 Ward Churchill, “Agents of Repression,” Excerpt available here.

292 Weyler, Rex “Blood on the Land,” page 54

293 “COINTELPRO Papers,” Page 270

294 Ibid.

* * * *

Conclusion

The Church Committee investigated COINTELPRO and concluded:

“Too many people have been spied upon by too many Government agencies and too much information has been collected. The Government has often undertaken the secret surveillance of citizens on the basis of their political beliefs, even when those beliefs posed no threat of violence or illegal acts on behalf of a hostile foreign power.

The Government, operating primarily through secret informants, but also using other intrusive techniques such as wiretaps, microphone “bugs”, surreptitious mail opening, and break-ins, has swept in vast amounts of information about the personal lives, views, and associations of American citizens. Investigations of groups deemed potentially dangerous – and even of groups suspected of associating with potentially dangerous organizations – have continued for decades, despite the fact that those groups did not engage in unlawful activity…

The Constitutional system of checks and balances has not adequately controlled intelligence activities. Until recently the Executive branch has neither delineated the scope of permissible activities nor established procedures for supervising intelligence agencies. Congress has failed to exercise sufficient oversight, seldom questioning the use to which its appropriations were being put.”

Simply put, the committee’s conclusions are correct but fall short. It is clear that for a period of nearly three decades, the FBI waged a literal domestic war on largely peaceful activists who sought to bring about social and political change. During the time of the Vietnam war, MK-ULTRA, the struggles of various civil rights movements, Watergate and other criminal acts in the executive branch, the United States needed effective leaders and organizations to affect change yet the FBI successfully suppressed any serious movements that arose.

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. How responsible is COINTELPRO for the fall of the American left in the 1970’s?

2. How likely is it that other high profile assassinations similar to Fred Hampton, such as Martin Luther King Jr., actions undertake by the FBI under COINTELPRO orders?

3. What movements are currently being subverted by the FBI today?

4. Did J. Edgar Hoover leave a corrupt infrastructure when he retired in 1972, after 37 years of being the FBI Director?

* * * *

Chapter IX: The Phoenix Program

Thanks to the New York Times and 60 Minutes, most people are now aware that former Senator and Presidential candidate Bob Kerrey once led a raid on the peasant village of Thanh Phong during his service in Vietnam, and murdered nearly two dozen villagers in cold blood. His team disemboweled women, children and infants and shot dead whole families.

What most people don’t know, is that Kerrey was operating on orders from a CIA program known as Operation Phoenix, the program that oversaw some of the most horrific war crimes ever unleashed on Earth.²⁹⁵

It was in 1964, under CIA station chief Peer DeSilva, that the Phoenix Program was initiated. DeSilva was a proponent of the belief of ‘counter-terrorism’, CIA doublespeak for the idea that terror was a legitimate tactic in unconventional warfare.²⁹⁶

Historian Douglas Valentine summarizes the concept of Operation Phoenix as follows:

“Central to Phoenix is the fact that it targeted civilians, not soldiers… Under Phoenix, due process was totally non-existent. South Vietnamese civilians whose names appeared on blacklists could be kidnapped, tortured, detained for two years without trial, or even murdered simply on the word of an anonymous informer.

“At its height, Phoenix managers imposed a quota of eighteen hundred neutralizations per month on the people running the program in the field, opening up the program to abuses by corrupt security officers, policemen, politicians, and racketeers, all of whom extorted innocent civilians as well as VCI [Viet Cong Infrastructure]. Legendary CIA officer Lucien Conein described Phoenix as, “A very good blackmail scheme for the central government: ‘If you don’t do what I want, you’re VC.’”

“Indeed, Phoenix was, among other things, an instrument of counter-terror – the psychological warfare tactic in which members of the VCI were brutally murdered along with their families or neighbors as a means of terrorizing the entire population into a state of submission. Such horrendous acts were, for propaganda purposes, often made to look as if they had been committed by the enemy.”²⁹⁷

This is the intellectual context under which Bob Kerrey massacred the hamlet of civilians, for which he was subsequently awarded the Bronze Star.

Peer DeSilva quickly expanded Phoenix to cover all 40 provinces in South Vietnam, each equipped with an Intelligence Coordinating Committee and its own prison. Torture techniques such as electric shock, beatings and rape were commonplace.²⁹⁸

The Central Intelligence Agency originally had trouble finding Americans who were willing to murder and mutilate, so the ‘counter-terror’ squads were composed of ex-convicts, VietCong defectors, and mercenaries.²⁹⁹ They then employed special forces, Navy SEALS and other highly trained Americans such as Bob Kerrey, who had essentially been indoctrinated by the military into killing machines, to oversee the program.

Former Lieutenant Colonel Anthony Herbert, who was involved in Operation Phoenix, described his experience in his autobiography Soldier: “They wanted me to take charge of execution teams that wiped out entire families and tried to make it look as though the VC themselves had done the killing.”³⁰⁰

Former CIA agent Ralph McGee, speaking to PBS‘s Bill Moyers for the fantastic documentary ‘The Secret Government‘, stated that:

“We were murdering these people, incinerating them… My efforts had resulted in the deaths of many people, and I just – for me it was a period when I guess I was – I considered myself nearly insane – I just couldn’t reconcile what I had been and what I was at the time becoming.”³⁰¹

McGee was operating under Phoenix helping to set up the South Vietnam secret police, and has since become one of the most outspoken critics on the CIA. He recalls that the program cost billions of dollars, and CIA Director William Colby refused an investigative audit before a Congressional Committee.³⁰²

The Agency’s website describes how the entire South Vietnamese population was mapped out with Census Grievance teams in conjunction with national data.³⁰³ They determined which villages were more likely to be friendly to the VietCong through interviews, and color coded maps based on that information, specifically noting that “These maps would often contain the names of family members who were VCI members or sympathetic to the communists.”

“I think it’s common knowledge what goes on at the interrogation center… It was common knowledge that when someone was picked up their lives were about at an end because the Americans most likely felt that, if they were to turn someone like that back into the countryside it would just be like multiplying NLF followers.” – Jeff Stein, Author and Former Military Intelligence, Vietnam Veteran³⁰⁴

The 1971 Congressional Inquiry revealed that the blacklists created by these maps and census data was not thoroughly vetted, as opposed to claims by Agency officials. One member of the Phoenix Program described to Congress that:

“It was my experience that the majority of people classified as VC were “captured” as a result of sweeping tactical operations. In effect, a huge dragnet was cast out in our area of operation (AR) and whatever looked good in the catch, regardless of evidence, was classified as VCI.”³⁰⁵

Lieutenant Vincent Okamoto, Army Combat Officer and recipient of the Distinguished Service Cross, testified on his experiences with using blacklists as a means of ‘neutralizing’ Viet Cong:

“The problem was, how do you find the people on the blacklist? It’s not like you had their address and telephone number. The normal procedure would be to go into a village and just grab someone and say, ‘Where’s Nguyen so-and-so?’ Half the time the people were so afraid they would say anything. Then a Phoenix team would take the informant, put a sandbag over his head, poke out two holes so he could see, put commo wire around his neck like a long leash, and walk him through the village and say, ‘When we go by Nguyen’s house scratch your head.’ Then that night Phoenix would come back, knock on the door, and say, ‘April Fool, motherfucker.’ Whoever answered the door would get wasted. As far as they were concerned whoever answered was a Communist, including family members. Sometimes they’d come back to camp with ears to prove that they killed people.”

Psychological warfare against civilians was an integral part of Phoenix. Soldiers would leave pamphlets on dead bodies, or on doors indicating that recipients were marked for death.

“Attention Villagers: 1.Your village was bombed because you harbored Vietcong in your village. 2. Your village was bombed because you gave help to the Vietcong in your area. 3. Your village was bombed because you gave food to the Vietcong.” – USMC Leaflet³⁰⁶

Phoenix officer Bart Osbourne testified before Congress in 1971:

“I never knew in the course of all those operations any detainee to live through his interrogation. They all died. There was never any reasonable establishment of the fact that any one of those individuals was, in fact, cooperating with the VC, but they all died and the majority were either tortured to death or things like thrown out of helicopters. It became a sterile depersonalized murder program.”³⁰⁷

Throwing victims out of a helicopter, for example, served a psychological warfare purpose as well, terrorizing those on the ground.

The intelligence that the CIA received was often flawed. Anyone in the South Vietnam infrastructure could report intelligence, and it was often not verified, which led to abuses such as South Vietnam politicians feeding intelligence to kill their political rivals.³⁰⁸

“We had no way of determining the background of these sources, nor their motivation for providing American units with information.

No American in the team spoke or understood Vietnamese well enough to independently debrief any “contact.” None of us were sufficiently sensitive to nor knowledgeable of the law, the culture, the customs, the history, etc.

Our paid sources could easily have been either provocateurs or opportunists with a score to settle. Every information report (IR) we wrote based on our sources’ information was classified as (1) unverifiable and (2) usually reliable source. As to the first, it speaks for itself; the second, in most cases was pure rationale for the existence of the program.” – Michael J Uhr, First Lieutenant involved with Phoenix.³⁰⁹

Historian Marvin Gettleman described in his book Vietnam and America: A Documented History, how “Intelligence gathered during interrogation was often used to direct ‘search and destroy’ missions aimed at wiping out whole villages or groups of villages.”³¹⁰

All told, documents show that Phoenix led to the ‘neutralizing’ of over 80,000 people, about a third of them killed, between the years of 1968 and 1972.³¹¹

One Pentagon contract-study of Phoenix’s operations found that only 3% of those ‘neutralized’ were full party members above the district level between 1970 and 1971, and that over half … “were not even party members.”³¹²

A Saigon government document lists the number of assassinated at over 40,000, nearly double that of other documents, highlighting potential disparity between record keeping and reality.³¹³ The program supposedly ended in 1972, though it has been revealed that at least certain aspects continued until the fall of Saigon in 1975. Understanding that official documents don’t cover the full scope of Phoenix, and the history of records destruction by the Agency, it is unlikely that the full extent of Phoenix will ever be known.

So what about the infamous My Lai massacre that resulted in the rape and mutilation of around 400 civilians? Historian Daniel Valentine argues it was most certainly a Phoenix operation. He cites a known ‘blacklist’ of names to be ‘neutralized’ in My Lai, multiple accounts of military personnel referring to the entire village as Viet Cong sympathizers, using the logic that only sympathizers could survive in the area, and a Vietnamese Colonel who said himself that My Lai was a Phoenix operation, among other evidence.³¹⁴

Marvin Gettleman concurs:

“By late 1967, before the Tet offensive, 70% of the villages in Quang Ngai province had already been destroyed.

In response to Tet, this slaughter was intensified literally with a vengeance. In mid-March on 1968, Quang Ngai province was the scene of what was to become the most notorious example: the massacre of villagers in My Lai 4. There the killing of hundreds of villagers, almost all unarmed women and children, and old men, so successfully swelled the body count that General Westmoreland sent a personal message of ‘Congratulations to officers and men of Charlie Company for outstanding action’ that ‘dealt the enemy a heavy blow’.

When the carnage finally came to light, evidence poured in showing that this massacre was not an aberration but just an especially appalling instance of a systematic strategy.” – Gettleman, page 411³¹⁵

Project Phoenix would first come to the public in 1971 with a congressional inquiry. William Colby, CIA chief and director of the Phoenix program, testified that the agency didn’t distinguish between VietCong members and civilians.³¹⁶ Colby would later defend the program, citing it as ‘the toughest opposition the Viet Cong faced’.³¹⁷

295 Counterpunch, “Fragging Bob,” May 17, 2001, written by Historian Douglas Valentine

296 Michael Otterman, “American Torture,” excerpt available here.

297 From Douglas Valentine’s website.

298 Alfred McCoy, “A Question of Torture,” excerpt available here.

299 Ibid, Valentine

300 Quoted in the book “Hero´s,” excerpt available here.

301 Documentary available here.

302 Ralph McGee, “CIA and Operation Phoenix in Vietnam,” February 19, 1996

303 CIA.Gov

304 Douglas Valentine, “The Phoenix Program,” excerpt available here.

305 Testimony to Congress by Michael J. Uhl, available here.

306 Leaflet excerpt available here.

307 Doug Valentine, “The Phoenix Program,” excerpt available here.

308 Ibid.

309 Testimony to Congress by Michael J. Uhl, available here.

310 Marvin Gettleman, “Vietnam and America,” excerpt available here.

311 Wikipedia article on the Phoenix Program

312 Alfred McCoy, “A Question of Torture,” excerpt available here.

313 “Fiscal Year 1975 Foreign Assistance Request,” excerpt available here.

314 Doug Valentine, “The Phoenix Program,” excerpt available here.

315 Gettleman, excerpt here.

316 Congressional Testimony, “U.S: Assistance Programs in Vietnam,” excerpt available here.

317 Interview with William Colby, 1981, available here.

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. In what other wars has terrorism been used as a tactic?

2. Is it possible that the multitude of abuses in Latin America in the decades that proceeded the Vietnam War were ‘Phoenix’ offshoots?

3. Why has there been such little discussion about the ‘Phoenix Program’ both in the mainstream media and in academia after its revelations came to light?

* * * *

Chapter X: Iran/Contra

“The common ingredients of the Iran and Contra policies were secrecy, deception, and disdain for the law… The United States simultaneously pursued two contradictory foreign policies — a public one and a secret one” – Report of the Congressional Committees Investigating the Iran-Contra Affair³¹⁸

“In spite of the wildly speculative and false stories of arms for hostages and alleged ransom payments, we did not—repeat, did not—trade weapons or anything else for hostages, nor will we.” – Ronald Reagan, November 1986

“A few months ago, I told the American people I did not trade arms for hostages. My heart and my best intentions still tell me that’s true, but the facts and evidence tell me it is not.” – Ronald Reagan, March 1987

Iran/Contra isn’t one singular historical conspiracy, but rather comprised of various illicit activities which revolved around a core group of subversive actors and a covert war in Nicaragua.

The ‘core of subversive actors’ consisted of members and associates of the National Security Council, created under the National Security Act of July 26, 1947. Since the act was passed, the NSC has steadily grown in power and scope under various presidencies. During Dwight D. Eisenhower’s administration in the ’50s, the NSC became a ‘virtual adjunct of the president’, and started reporting directly to the executive branch. John F. Kennedy, skeptical of the CIA and other agencies after the Bay of Pigs fiasco, allowed the NSC to begin functioning operationally, evolving from its traditional role as a planning committee.³¹⁹ Under Ronald Reagan, the NSC expanded with increased staff and scope of operations. Under Eisenhower, it had been tasked with creating a:

“…virtual Cold War machine against Communism,” and to “create and exploit troublesome problems for international Communism… reduce international Communist control over any areas of the world,” and “develop underground resistance and facilitate covert and guerilla operations.”³²⁰

This directive would be the rational and motivation for the group conducting subversive actions in Nicaragua under the Reagan administration.

318 Report hosted at Archive.org

319 Draper, Theodore. “A Very Thin Line: the Iran-Contra Affairs”, 1991, p. 4

320 Draper, p. 6

* * * *

Nicaragua

United States intervention in Nicaragua is nothing new. The U.S. had landed troops numerous times in the country during the 19th century. As recently as 1912, during a period known as the ‘banana wars’, U.S. military forces directly quelled rebellions against the American-supported leadership. In 1936, the American-trained head of the Nicaraguan National Guard, Somoza Garcia, forcefully took power in the country by murdering and disposing the former leader Augusto César Sandino, marking the beginning of a lengthy U.S. Supported dictatorship.³²¹

Trouble arose in the 1970’s, when a revolutionary communist party called ‘The Sandanistas’, named after the disposed Sandino, began mounting a series of attacks and sabotage against the right wing Somoza dynasty, including the high-profile kidnapping of Nicaraguan elite at a Christmas party in 1974. The Sandanistas enjoyed wide support from much of the disenfranchised Nicaraguan population, who had become tired of the heavy-handed Somoza rule. One striking example is the 1972 earthquake that struck the Nicaraguan capital Managua, where Anastasia Debayle, son of Somoza Garcia, exercised emergency powers that allowed him to confiscate most of the international aid that had been directed towards rebuilding the city, instead ending enriching Debayle’s personal coffers.³²²

In 1979, the Sandanista uprising culminated in their gaining full power in Nicaragua. They were helped by the policies of Jimmy Carter, who had withdrawn aid to the Somoza regime after a series of revelations of human rights abuses. Carter originally hoped to remain on good terms with the Sandanistas, who had constructed a defacto socialist government in Nicaragua, and responded by sending them $99 million in aid. After they solidified a pact with the Soviet Bloc in 1980, Carter changed his tune and authorized the CIA to begin subversive acts in the country including propaganda efforts but prohibiting direct conflict.³²³

In 1980, right wing elements in Nicaragua created the Nicaraguan Democratic Force, FDN, which would become the largest and most organized member of the group that would become known as the ‘Contras’. When Reagan was inaugurated in 1981, he stepped up support of the group and expanded the scope of covert action in the country, allowing the CIA to directly arm, fund and train the Contras.

In 1983, he signed the National Security Decision Directive 77, entitled “Management of Public Diplomacy Relative to National Security,” institutionalizing public diplomacy. In effect, it was a special planning group within the NSC to coordinate public diplomacy campaigns, the most institutionalized ‘public propaganda ministry’ in United States history.³²⁴ The group used extensive media propaganda and control efforts, with one 14 page memorandum written by Oliver North detailing over 80 specific ‘publicity stunts’ designed to influence congressional and public opinion before upcoming Contra aid votes.³²⁵

When the covert war in Nicaragua became public knowledge in 1982, a group of congressmen led by Massachusetts representative Edward P. Boland tried to end all covert efforts in the country. This was with good reason, as news of the human rights abuses of the Contras became public knowledge. For example, a 1987 Chicago Tribune article noted that the Contras “engaged repeatedly in kidnappings, torture and murder of unarmed civilians.”³²⁶

The Guardian would delve deeper into the atrocities of the Contras, describing a particular attack where “Rosa had her breasts cut off. Then they cut into her chest and took out her heart. The men had their arms broken, their testicles cut off. They were killed by slitting their throats and pulling the tongue out through the slit.”³²⁷

Americas Watch, a humans rights group, accused the Contras of³²⁸:

• targeting health care clinics and health care workers for assassination

• kidnapping civilians

• torturing civilians

• executing civilians, including children, who were captured in combat

• raping women

• indiscriminately attacking civilians and civilian houses

• seizing civilian property

• burning civilian houses in captured towns.

These were the principle means of waging war. Meanwhile, Reagan called the Contras the “moral equivalent of the founding fathers”.³²⁹

The terrorism of the Contras was not simply ‘collateral damage’ of supporting subversive groups. Rather, evidence shows that it was a deliberate campaign led by the CIA in the vein of Phoenix. In fact, the CIA wrote the training manual for the Contras titled “Psychological Operations in Guerrilla Warfare” which, among other activities, advocated for assassinating judges and priests, blackmailing citizens, blowing up public buildings, and firing on dissenting citizens.³³⁰

Congressman Boland submitted legislation on December 21, 1982 which would become known as the Boland Amendment. It specifically barred “the use of funds ‘for the purpose of’ overthrowing the government of Nicaragua or provoking a war between Nicaragua and Honduras.”³³¹ Open defiance was impossible, but the CIA, NSC and the Reagan Administration were dedicated to supporting the Contras at all costs, so they chose various methods of covert defiance by exploiting loopholes in the amendment.

As long as the funds going to the Contras were not tagged as being used for overthrowing the Sandanista government, then they could be delivered under the guise of international aid. The use of soliciting third party funding was also left out of the Boland Amendment. Ultimately, the Boland Amendment had no tangible impact on the covert war in Nicaragua.

During the period proceeding the Boland Amendment, the CIA directly assisted the Contra’s subversive efforts. One example is the use of air strikes against an airport near Managua. They also placed mines in Nicaraguan harbors in 1984, damaging several ships. The Wall Street Journal,which exposed these covert actions, also revealed the role of Oliver North, a Marine Colonel working on assignment with the NSC, in coordinating the actions, one of the first mentions of a name which would become notorious to the public just a few years later.³³²

Congress soon realized the ineffectiveness of the Boland Amendment and responded with new legislation that toughened the restrictions on funding the support, known as the Boland Amendment II. It read:

“During fiscal year 1985, no funds available to the Central Intelligence Agency, the Department of Defense, or any other agency or entity of the United States involved in intelligence activities may be obligated or expended for the purpose or which would have the effect of supporting directly or indirectly, military or paramilitary operations in Nicaragua by any nation, group, organization, movement or individual.”³³³

This legislation left two loopholes: first, was the use of third party funds to fund the contras, and the second was that the text explicitly referred to the actions of the CIA, but failed to mention the NSC, using the logic that it was not an intelligence agency, under the Department of Defense, or even covered under the provision of “any … entity of the United States.” This was based on the idea that the NSC was: “the President’s principal forum for considering national security and foreign policy matters with his senior national security advisers and cabinet officials” and thus exempt.³³⁴

This transition of techniques led Oliver North to take on a primary role in Contra assistance.

321 Brown University, “The Iran/Contra Affair.”

322 Ibid.

323 Ibid.

324 NSDD77, hosted here at FAS.org

325 Foreign Policy, “Iran-Contra’s Untold Story.” 1988

326 Chicago Tribune, “Contras Humans Rights Record Attacked,” January 10, 1987

327 ISLA, excerpt available here. The book contains clippings of Latin American political, social and economic news from various English language newspapers. This particular quote is cited as coming from The Guardian.

328 Wikipedia article on the Contras

329 PBS, “The Iran-Contra Affair”

330 Document hosted here at FAS.org

331 Brown University

332 Brown University

333 The 1984 Boland Amendment (PDF Warning)

334 Brown University

* * * *

Israel and Iran

Barred from using direct Agency funds for the Contra operations, Oliver North and the NSC began to get creative. One result is the infamous ‘Diversion Memo’, written by North, detailing a plan to sell arms to Iran, overcharge the country and funnel excess funds to the Contras. This plan was blatantly illegal under Operation Staunch, a U.S. led arms embargo against Iran during the Iran-Iraq war which lasted from ’80 to ’90.

At the outset of the war, the US began arming Iraq, first with 200 million dollars in helicopters, and later escalating to several billion dollars worth of economic aid, the sale of dual-use technology, non-U.S. origin weaponry, military intelligence, Special Operations training, and direct involvement in warfare against Iran.³³⁵

The ‘Diversion Memo’ detailed a plan to work with a retired Air Force General and an Iranian businessman to sell arms to Iran, through the cover of Israel, in exchange for the release of American hostages held by Lebanese militants. Initially, the plan worked relatively well: Israel provided Iran with hundreds of TOW anti-tank missiles and multiple American hostages were released.³³⁶

The deal was completed just months after Ronald Reagan famously said: “The United States gives terrorists no rewards. We make no concessions, we make no deals.”³³⁷ Although North estimated that $12 million would be raised for the Contras in this manner, only $2 million ever made it to the group, likely because the private actors involved in the Operation were acting with a motivation of profit.

As is thematic with American covert operations, the funds were funneled through a ‘front organization’ called Stanford Technology Trading Group International, as well as using ‘proprietary’ airlines to transfer the missiles: aircraft owned by the CIA and used in normal operations until needed by the Agency for covert operations.³³⁸

The story unraveled in 1986 when two Lebanon reporters broke the story of the secret arms transfer. The revelations sparked the widely publicized hearings in the United States to find the ‘truth’ of the operations. In 1987 hearings, Oliver North was given immunization from self-incrimination before Congress. Regarding the destruction of documents, he humorously noted: “I would prefer to say that I shredded documents that day like I did on all other days, but perhaps with increased intensity; that’s correct.”³³⁹

The hearings’ Majority Report concluded that:

“North’s testimony demonstrates that he also lied to members of the Executive branch, including the Attorney General, and officials of the State Department, CIA and NSC.” And also that… “other officials lied repeatedly to Congress and to the American people about the Contra covert action and Iran arms sales, and that he altered and destroyed official documents.”

335 Wikipedia article on United States Support for Iraq During the Iran-Iraq War

336 Brown University, “The Iran/Contra Affair.”

337 Chicago Tribune, “President: Terrorists Must Pay,” July 1, 1985

338 Brown University

339 Ibid.

* * * *

Rex 84

The most shocking revelation of the Contra hearings, which the mainstream media nearly universally failed to report on, was the existence of an emergency preparedness plan known as Rex 84. The only public mention of the plan, known officially as ‘Readiness Exercise 1984’, was as follows:

Congressman Jack Brooks: Colonel North, in your work at the N.S.C. were you not assigned, at one time, to work on plans for the continuity of government in the event of a major disaster?

Brendan Sullivan [North’s lawyer, agitatedly]: Mr. Chairman?

Senator Daniel Inouye: I believe that question touches upon a highly sensitive and classified area so may I request that you not touch upon that?

Brooks: I was particularly concerned, Mr. Chairman, because I read in Miami papers, and several others, that there had been a plan developed, by that same agency, a contingency plan in the event of emergency, that would suspend the American constitution. And I was deeply concerned about it and wondered if that was an area in which he had worked. I believe that it was and I wanted to get his confirmation.

Inouye: May I most respectfully request that that matter not be touched upon at this stage. If we wish to get into this, I’m certain arrangements can be made for an executive session.

Luckily, the media was able to get more details on the program which was too sensitive to discuss in a public forum. The Miami Herald, in a July 5, 1987 exposé, published the following:

“Some of President Reagan’s top advisers have operated a virtual parallel government outside the traditional cabinet departments and agencies almost from the day Reagan took office, congressional investigators and administration officials have concluded.

Investigators believe that the advisers’ activities extended well beyond the secret arms sales to Iran and aid to the Contras now under investigation.

Lt. Col. Oliver North, for example, helped draw up a controversial plan to suspend the Constitution in the event of a national crisis, such as a nuclear war, violent and widespread internal dissent or national opposition to a U.S. military invasion abroad.” The Miami Herald³⁴⁰

Implementation of Rex 84 would have turned control over the United States to FEMA, the Federal Emergency Management Agency, which would act as an ’emergency czar’, and turn control of state and local governments to appointed Military commanders, and also included mention of ‘assembly centers and relocation camps’ to house dissidents. Attorney General William Smith correctly protested that the plan “exceeded its proper function as a coordinating agency for emergency preparedness.”³⁴¹

It doesn’t take reading between the lines to see the immediate intent of Rex 84. The NSA, CIA and other U.S. institutions believed that an invasion of Nicaragua might have been necessary to prevent the spread of communism so close to their borders. Such an idea isn’t farfetched: Sandanista policies and their agreements with the Soviet Union indicate that they believed an American invasion was imminent.³⁴² Being just a decade removed from the massively unpopular Vietnam War, an invasion would have prompted widespread dissent, and Rex 84 was the NSC’s plan to deal with a domestic anti-war movement.

The investigation described by the Miami Herald had interesting revelations of other activities. For example, it revealed that the ‘secret government’ stole President Carter’s briefing book used in campaign speeches and presidential debates with Reagan, indicating that the structure was in existence before Reagan’s inauguration. It noted meetings with Iranian officials to discuss the release the delay of the release of U.S. Embassy hostages until after the election. Lastly, it discussed how certain officials orchestrated leaks to paint Reagan in a positive light, such as the November 4, 1984 election day announcement that Soviet Jet Fighters were on their way to Nicaragua, orchestrated by Oliver North himself.³⁴³

340 Miami Herald, “Reagan Aides and the ‘Secret’ Government,” July 5, 1987. An absolutely fascinating article worth reading in its entirety.

341 Ibid.

342 Brown University, “The Iran/Contra Affair.”

343 Miami Herald

* * * *

Conclusions

Chief Counsel of the investigative Senate committee, Arthur Liman, wrote in a memo to panel leader Senator Daniel Inouye:

“This is the part of the story that reveals the whole secret ‘government-within-a-government’ operated from the [Executive Office Building] by a Lt. Col. with its own army, airforce, diplomatic agents, intelligence operatives appropriations capacity.”³⁴⁴

As the ‘Report of the Congressional Committees Investigating the Iran-Contra Affair’ noted, the United States had an actual foreign policy that vastly differed from their public discourse, and was executed in secret without checks and balances. When Congress tried to stop the covert operations, the agencies involved simply found loopholes to subvert their legislation, going as far as to arm two sides fighting against each other in a war, and to use private actors to conduct illicit activities. Furthermore, Rex 84 shows just how serious the ‘secret government’ was in exerting hegemony in Latin America.

The term ‘secret government’ is not an exaggeration. Various investigations, public and private, noted that Ronald Reagan himself may not have been aware of many activities the group undertook. These facts were all revealed in the mainstream media in a short period proceeding the Iran arms sales revelations, yet the public was never able to fully inform itself of the depths of the scandal.

344 Miami Herald, “Reagan Aides and the ‘Secret’ Government,” July 5, 1987. An absolutely fascinating article worth reading in its entirety.

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. Why was the American public so complacent when the facts of a veritable shadow government were thoroughly revealed in the media?

2. Why was there no significant drive for reform of the CIA originating from within Congress?

3. How often does the CIA disregard domestic and international law when it interferes with their agenda?

4. Why did the CIA find hegemony in Nicaragua to be so important? What threat, if any, did the country pose to the United States?

5. Does a modern version of Rex 84 exist today?

6. How far will the United States go to suppress domestic dissent the next time they deem a foreign invasion necessary?

Note: Feeling overwhelmed with this material? Take an inspiration break in our Inspiration Center.

* * * *

Chapter XI: Continuity of Government

The definition of ‘Continuity of Government’ is a set of contingency plans to ensure that essential government functions remain in place after a disaster such as nuclear war. In the United States, Continuity of Government plans have been on the books since at least the Eisenhower administration. The plans involved building intricate hidden command centers such as the Mount Weather Emergency Operations Center built in 1959, nestled away in the Blue Ridge Mountains.

While the Government officially classifies Mt. Weather as a ‘bunker’, many sources claim that it is essentially a full blown city. According to GlobalSecurity.org, a respected institution in the intelligence community, Mount Weather contains a hospital, sewer treatment system, reservoirs, a power plant, an emergency television studio, and a thorough system of dormitories & office buildings.³⁴⁵

None of this is out of the ordinary, so to speak. It is reasonable for the government to have such plans in place. However, on September 11, 2001, the Continuity of Operations plan was officially activated and has been live ever since, meaning that Mt. Weather and similar installations are likely in operation today.

“A national emergency exists by reason of the terrorist attacks at the World Trade Center, New York, New York, and the Pentagon, and the continuing and immediate threat of further attacks on the United States,” President George W. Bush proclaimed on September 14, 2001.

Dick Cheney officially enacted the “Continuation of Government” plans shortly after the World Trade Center attacks, although the Bush Administration would not confirm that this took place until March, 2002.³⁴⁶ A simultaneous ‘State of Emergency’ was declared and is also in effect today, extended each year by George Bush and then Barack Obama.³⁴⁷

CBS reported:

“A ‘shadow government’ consisting of 75 or more senior officials has been living and working secretly outside Washington since Sept. 11 in case the nation’s capital is crippled by terrorist attack. “This is serious business,” President Bush said of plans to ensure the continuity of government.

Such an operation was conceived as a Cold War precaution against nuclear attack during the Eisenhower administration but never used until now. It went into effect in the first hours after the terror attacks and has evolved over time, said senior government officials who provided details of the plan.

Under the classified “Continuity of Operations Plan,” which was first reported by The Washington Post in its Friday editions, high-ranking officials representing their departments have begun rotating in and out of the assignment at one of two fortified locations along the East Coast.

The Post said the first rotations were made in late October or early November, a fact confirmed by a senior government official late Thursday.

Officials who are activated for the duty live and work underground 24 hours a day, away from their families, according to the Post. The shadow government has sent home most of the first wave of deployed personnel, replacing them most commonly at 90-day intervals.

The government-in-waiting is an extension of a policy that has kept Vice President Dick Cheney in secure, undisclosed locations away from Washington. Cheney has moved in and out of public view as threat levels have fluctuated.”³⁴⁸

Serious business indeed. There have been instances where Congressmen have been stonewalled when trying to learn more about the secret operations. One example is Oregon Congressman Peter DeFazio, a key member of the Homeland Security Committee, pushed to review the classified portion of the Continuity plan in a secure setting in 2007 but his access was denied.³⁴⁹

What can we know about the Continuity of Operations plan currently in effect? Patrick Thronson, editor-in-chief of the University of Michigan Journal of Law Reform, has put together the most comprehensive publicly available paper detailing the states of emergencies and powers granted to the executive branch.³⁵⁰ Available knowledge is naturally incomplete because many powers and documents are still classified. Some highlights include:

• Congress is required by statue to vote on the continuation of a state of National Emergency every six months. Since September 11th, 2001, it has only happened once.

• There are currently thirty simultaneous declared states of emergency.

• The Executive Branch can freeze the assets and prevent financial transactions of individuals. This extends to even basic life necessities. They can go as far as to prohibit donations of food to said person.

• The president can unilaterally order the inspection and seizure of commercial vessels.

• The president is authorized to suspend or alter rules for broadcast stations, or authorize control of said station.

• Provisions to suspend or control internet traffic.

“Thus, the only apparent legal obstacle standing between present conditions and this degree of government control over mass media and telecommunications is a presidential order. ” – Thronson

• The ability to seize property

• The delegation of ‘maintaining law and order’ to the department of defense.

• Extend military tours of duty beyond contractually agreed termination dates.

“A nation under thirty states of national emergency can hardly claim that emergency laws are the exception to—rather than the rule of—normal governance. ” – Thronson

Like every other case study of covert activities highlighted in this book, ‘Continuity of Operations’ has a friendly face but the actual workings of the secret government are strictly secret. Suffice it to say that the powers behind the Iran/Contra activities have become fully institutionalized.

The implications are that the workings of Congress, the Justice Department and other institutions have become merely a show to distract from the reality that a secret government which does not respond to civilian rule and has granted itself sweeping, unchecked powers and is certainly directly operating in the realm of foreign policy, covert activities and likely domestic espionage, among other potential activities.

345 Mount Weather profile at GlobalSecurity.org

346 CBS, “The Shadow Government,” February 11, 2009

347 MSNBC, “Obama quietly extends post-9/11 state of national emergency,” September 11, 2013

348 CBS, “The Shadow Government,” February 11, 2009

349 Oregon Live, “DeFazio demands access to classified information,” July 27, 2007

350 Patrick Thronson, “Towards Comprehensive Reform of America’s Emergency Law Regime,” March 23, 2013

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. Is there any limit to the powers that the shadow government has granted itself?

2. Why has there been nearly zero coverage of the Continuity of Government in the media? Why have only one or two congressman openly questioned its existence?

3. Who is in control of the Continuity of Government operations? What is their agenda?

* * * *

Chapter XII: The Pedophocracy

Authors Note: The next three chapters may contain triggers for those who have suffered sexual abuse.

“Laura Lederer, a senior State Department adviser on trafficking, told me, ”We’re not finding victims in the United States because we’re not looking for them.” – New York Times³⁵¹

“What you have to understand, John [DeCamp], is that sometimes there are forces and events too big, too powerful, with so much at stake for other people or institutions, that you cannot do anything about them, not matter how evil or wrong they are and no matter how dedicated or sincere you are or how much evidence you have. That is simply one of the hard facts of life you have to face. You have done your part. You have tried to expose the evil and wrongdoing. It has hurt you terribly. But it has not killed you up to this point. I am telling you, get out of this before it does. Sometimes things are just too big for us to deal with, and we have to step aside and let history take its course. For you, John, this is one of those times.” – Former CIA Director William Colby³⁵²

351 New York Times, “The Girls Next Door,” January 25, 2004

352 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup”. You may remember William Colby from the ‘Phoenix Program’ chapter, the CIA operation which he presided over. The book is fascinating and is a ‘must read’. (PDF Warning).

* * * *

From Washington, D. C…

“Homosexual Prostitution Inquiry Ensnares VIPs with Reagan, Bush”.³⁵³ This article was published in the Washington Times and was written by award-winning, Pulitzer Prize nominated journalist Paul Rodriguez. After years of research, Rodriguez had compiled the radical evidence necessary to publish such claims.

He had uncovered a homosexual prostitution ring tied to the White House. One central figure, Craig Spence, a Republican powerbroker, had the political clout to bring prostitutes on midnight tours of the White House. The report names multiple White House insiders, military personnel and members of major media institutions as clients, based on credit card records procured by Rodriguez.

“Among the client names contained in the vouchers – and identified by prostitutes and escort operators – are government officials, locally based US military officers, businessmen, lawyers, bankers, congressional aides and other professionals…

Although the confiscated material was turned over to District police on the scene, witnesses and law enforcement agents say the Secret Service kept one box containing names and other information about high-level government officials who were clients of the male escort business.

District police officials say that, to their knowledge, this is the first time the Secret Service has ever become involved in such a raid in this area.” – Washington Times

Craig Spence would throw extravagant parties for the Washington D.C. elite, with ‘call boys’ freely available for interested party-goers. Various associates, including multiple of Spence’s body guards, came forward and admitted that his house, where the parties were located, was thoroughly bugged with audio and video recording equipment, with the intent of extortion and blackmail of those who ended up in compromising positions.³⁵⁴

Spence was somewhat of a mystery man. What type of employment did he have? No one knew for sure, though Spence himself would often boast of his important connections. One of his associates told the Times:

“He described Mr. Spence as ‘strange’, saying he often boasted that he was working for the CIA, and on one occasion said he was going to disappear for a while ‘because he had an important CIA assignment’. According to the businessman, Mr. Spence told him that the ‘CIA might double-cross him’, however, and kill him instead and then ‘make it look like a suicide.’” – Washington Times³⁵⁵

Indeed, Spence would die just months after the interview, of an apparent suicide, but not before admitting that his parties were bugged by friendly intelligence assets which he refused to name.³⁵⁶The investigation by Paul Rodriguez and his associates would also screech to a halt after all of the evidence was either classified by the Secret Service or tied up in red tape. Someone in a high position of power clearly did not want the full extent of the revelations to become public.

Homosexual prostitution on its own isn’t shocking, and depending on your conceptions of morality, no different than the heterosexual prostitution that is likewise rampant in Washington D.C. with the only tangible difference being the repercussions of entrapment (especially for Republicans). However, one particular part of the investigation leads us down a shocking rabbit hole:

“In addition to credit-card fraud, the investigation is said to be focused on illegal interstate prostitution, abduction and use of minors for sexual perversion, extortion, larceny and related illicit drug trafficking and use by prostitutes and their clients.” – Washington Times³⁵⁷

In fact, the name Craig Spence would appear repeatedly in another major prostitution inquiry, this one centered around children, known today as the Franklin Scandal, one of the darkest stains in the history of the United States.

353 Full text can be read here.

354 Washington Times, “Power Broker Served Drugs, Sex at Parties Bugged for Blackmail,” June 30, 1989

355 Ibid.

356 Washington Times, “Spence Arrested in N.Y., Released.” August 9, 1989.

357 Washington Times, “Homosexual Prostitution Inquiry Ensnares VIPs with Reagan, Bush,” June 29, 1989

* * * *

…To Franklin, Nebraska

The story of the ‘Franklin Scandal’ begins with Lawrence E. King, one of the fastest rising Republican stars of the 1980’s. He was a public figure in Franklin, Nebraska who ran the Franklin Federal Credit Union, along with a series of restaurants and bars. These various businesses apparently furnished King’s lavish lifestyle of private jets, extravagant parties and an entourage of assistants and bodyguards.

Larry King, as he was known, was accused by seven children of child abuse and prostitution before he sang the National Anthem at the 1988 Republican National Convention. But despite various petitions to local police and the FBI, no official investigations were ever undertaken.³⁵⁸

One of the allegations began from the serious abuse of children at the hands of Jarret and Barbara Webb, the former a member of the Franklin Credit Union board; the latter a cousin of King, who adopted various foster children and would proceed to subject them to horrific physical, emotional and sexual abuse. The girls housed at the Webbs told of being taken to various parties in the Franklin area where Larry King and other important local figures sexually abused them. One of the girls, Eulice Washington, recalled being flown on King’s private jets to be abused across the country.

“Among the first accusers was Eulice Washington, who claimed King flew her to out-of-state pedophilic orgies. She had been adopted by relatives of King’s in the 1970s. Her new ‘mother’ was King’s cousin Barbara Webb, and her new ‘father’ was husband Jarrett Webb, who sat on the board of the Franklin Federal Credit Union. To Eulice Washington, King had been Uncle Larry. ‘Larry King set up the pedophile ring,’ says Eulice. ‘From my knowledge and from what I saw go down, he was the man who got it moving and rolling. Everything went through him. He loves boys. He loves them like he shouldn’t.’” – The Franklin Scandal: A Story of Powerbrokers, Child Abuse and Betrayal³⁵⁹

Despite Eulice passing various lie detector tests, charges were never pressed against the Webbs.³⁶⁰ The Foster Care Review Board was the first organization to come across various cases of abuse, from Eulice Washington and others. They wrote numerous letters to Nebraska’s Attorney General Robert Spire urging an investigation, but their pleas were ignored.

The FCRB testified to the State Legislature’s Investigative Executive Review Board Subcommittee in 1988 that:

FCRB Chairman Dennis Carlson: The nature of these allegations are something that is going to shock the Committee. They deal with cult activities… they deal with sexual abuse, and there’s a correlation between these two different reports. We have, the Boys’ Town report… prepared by a worker from Boys’ Town named Julie Walters… (which) contains the allegations of the children that were in the Webb foster home, Nelly primarily. Years later, well, two years later, we have Loretta Smith in Richard Young Hospital who’s making allegations against Larry King, and as far as we know there is no relationship between Nelly and Loretta Smith… Both reports talk about the Omaha Girls Club, both reports mention a specific individual who is the superintendent of schools.

State Senator Remmers: The question that came into mind, it’s been in my mind since you’ve been testifying, and I think you’ve answered part of it just now, is you’re talking about about these abuses from children from Boys’ Town and Girls’ Club and so forth, now is there a common thread that goes over here to the Credit Union deal that we are investigating? In other words to the Franklin Credit Union? Is there a common thread there that kind of leads to that?

FCRB Member Carol Stitt: Well, the common thread is Larry King.

Remmers: Yes, that’s what I mean. It all goes back to him? OK.

Stitt: Yes, he seems to be more the organizer, or the high-class pimp, I mean if that helps fit this together.³⁶¹

Larry King would also be linked to embezzlement before he sang the National Anthem at the 1988 Republican National Convention, but again avoided an investigation. The facade unraveled in November 1988, when an IRS investigation revealed that King had stolen over $40 million from the coffers of the Franklin Federal Credit Union. The financial corruption alone shocked the city, but soon reports started circulating that in addition to various fraudulent accounting documents, investigators found a huge stash of child pornography as well.³⁶²

More rumors of sexual abuse began to arise, with multiple allegations that Larry King was using children from Boys Town, the nearby Catholic charitable institution for orphaned youth.³⁶³ His yellow sports car was notorious on the Boys Town campus, where he would drive around and pick up minors for his pedophilic activities. The Catholic management denied any connection to King, but financial records showed that Boys Town had a close-knit relationship to the Franklin Federal Credit Union.³⁶⁴ Federal and local authorities immediately moved to close the investigation and seal evidence, claiming that allegations of child abuse were unfounded.³⁶⁵

The authorities backtracked and stated that they had done everything in their power to investigate these claims. Attorney General Robert Spire said: “We did receive some sensitive information in July. My office acted promptly and professionally and nothing was sat on.” However, it would later be revealed that no authorities ever interviewed Eulice Washington and other children noted by the FCRB until 3 years later after they made their report public.³⁶⁶

Despite this, Omaha Chief of Police Robert Wadman stated to the press that “Every step that should have been taken, was taken.”³⁶⁷ However, Wadman would later confess that he had never contacted Eulice Washington, one of the children abused at the hands of Webb, nor the Child Protective Services department that handled Washington’s claims.³⁶⁸ Wadman would later be identified as a child abuser at King’s parties by four different victims.³⁶⁹

358 FranklinCase.org, “Franklin Timeline”

359 Nick Bryant, “The Franklin Scandal: A Story of Powerbrokers, Child Abuse and Betrayal”. Nick Bryant is a celebrated investigative journalist who spent nearly a decade researching the Franklin case, traveling over 40,000 miles and compiling the most complete accounting of events to date. Unfortunately, I have been unable to find a freely available copy on the internet. You should buy this book if any, however, because 50% of the proceeds are being donated to organizations that are fighting child abuse.

360 Ibid.

361 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup,” page 80. PDF available here.

362 Omaha World-Herald, “Lawsuit: King Diverted Millions From Franklin,” November 15, 1988

363 New York Times, “A Lurid, Mysterious Scandal Begins Taking Shape in Omaha,” December 18, 1988

364 Discover Channel Documentary “Conspiracy of Silence”.

365 Omaha World-Herald, “‘No Substance,’ Say Police, FBI Evidence Called Lacking To Link Franklin, Abuse,” February 5, 1989

366 Nick Bryant

367 Ibid.

368 Ibid.

369 Discovery Channel, “Conspiracy of Silence”

* * * *

Obstruction, Threats and Murder

In an early police investigation, low level police officers attempted to keep their inquiries a secret from Wadman, seemingly knowing that he would be adamant about shutting down their investigation. Nebraska Foster Care Review Board official Dennis Carlson related Omaha Police Officer Carmean’s testimony to the Legislature’s Executive Board hearing:

“[Officer Carmean] told me some things which I found to be somewhat startling. I asked if he was interested in information regarding Larry King and he said, yes we are, we’re conducting what he called a supersensitive investigation of Larry King and he said this investigation was so supersensitive that they were not even using the steno pool in the Omaha Police Department. They were handwriting their police reports, and he also told me that Chief Wadman had come to their unit and directly asked if they were investigating Larry King…. Investigator Carmean told me, we lied to the Chief and we said, no, we are not investigating Larry King. OK, so that conversation took place on July 20th of 1988”³⁷⁰

Shortly afterward, Officer Carmean was transferred out of the Robbery and Sex unit and the investigation stalled. On July 5, 1989, in a lengthy “Inter-Office Communication” to Omaha Public Safety Director Pitmon Foxall (a cousin of Larry King), Wadman announced that Carmean needed a mental health evaluation.³⁷¹

Many were not convinced of the Police Department’s conclusion that there was no substance to the abuse allegations, including a group of 12 State Senators who decided to create their own parallel commission to investigate the charges, lead by Senator Loran Schmit. Following the money trail, Schmit and his team quickly found that it could be traced directly to the sex parties and child abuse. It became clear to Schmit that he was uncovering some serious ‘dirty laundry’:

“I received a phone call on the floor of the legislature. The caller would not identify himself, but he said, Loren, you do not want to have an investigation of the Franklin Federal Credit Union, and I asked, who am I speaking to? And they said, that doesn’t matter, but you shouldn’t have that investigation. And I said, well, why not? And he said, it will reach to the highest levels of the republican party, and we’re both good republicans.” – Loran Schmit³⁷²

Schmit wasn’t the only one to receive threats. The lead investigator of the State Senator’s Committee, Gary Caradori, had also specified that he had received a series of threats, such as obvious tampering with his vehicle, as to send a message. In early July 1990, Caradori made a trip to Chicago to meet with a secret informant who had evidence which would ‘blow the lid’ off the case, and reportedly confided to a friend that he was one step ahead of those who wanted to squash the investigation, saying that if ‘they’ knew what information he had, he would be killed.³⁷³

Upon returning from Chicago, Caradori’s plane crashed, killing him and his son. The National Transportation Safety Board investigation found that the wreckage was scattered over a radius between 3/4 to 1 mile, indicating without a doubt that the plane broke up in the air, instead of upon impact. Certain items were missing from the crash, most notably Caradori’s briefcase. Within 24 hours, all of the evidence was collected by the FBI and sealed.³⁷⁴

370 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup,” page 48. PDF available here.

371 Ibid, page 49

372 Discovery Channel, “Conspiracy of Silence”

373 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup.” PDF available here.

374 Discovery Channel, “Conspiracy of Silence”

* * * *

The Paul Bonacci Trial

What information was so important that the pedophile network would kill the lead investigator in what looked like a blatant assassination? It turns out he was meeting with Russell ‘Rusty’ Nelson, a photographer for Larry King, who attended King’s parties with the intention of photographing powerful men in compromising positions with minors, in order to blackmail them later.³⁷⁵

Like Craig Spence, King was known to throw lavish parties for the Republican elite, with underage prostitutes allegedly in attendance. Rusty Nelson was in hiding for an entire decade after the Franklin Scandal broke but ended his silence under oath during a court hearing in 1999, in order to ‘set the record straight’. He revealed that he had a very close relationship with King and kept hundreds of thousands of photographs of King’s business dealings and parties in various locations. Most of the evidence had been confiscated, and more had been destroyed in Gary Caradori’s plane crash.

Rusty’s testimony to the District Court was very interesting. Among other events, he revealed that he personally saw Larry King place a direct call to then-president Ronald Reagan when other associates could not resolve a specific problem. He also claimed to have seen and taken pictures of the Chief of Police of Omaha Robert Wadman at various parties, engaged in various sexual acts with minors, and had once seen Wadman accept a large envelope full of bearer bonds from King. While most of Rusty’s evidence was confiscated, he was able to provide the court with photographs that corroborated his close relationship to King, such as photographs of King inside his private jet and limousine, and alongside male strippers.³⁷⁶

The District Court hearing was not about Rusty Nelson, but rather for compensation for one of the victims, Paul Bonacci, who had first made accusations of abuse against Larry King in 1986, two years before there was even a Franklin Scandal. The testimony given was so convincing that the judge awarded Bonacci with $1 million. The plan was to donate the proceeds to charitable organizations dealing with child abuse, but King has never paid. Paul Bonacci suffered from Multiple Personality Disorder, a diagnosis confirmed by three different state-appointed psychiatrists, from extreme abuse he had received beginning at the age of 3. At the age of 8, he became associated with Larry King and began attending his parties as a child prostitute.

The type of abuse Bonacci underwent at the hands of Larry King is shocking:

Bonacci: “They put guns up to my head, they put guns in my mouth… Larry King sent out boys, men, to jump me, he had them pretty well beat the tar out of me from the waist down so no one would see the marks, i had my fingers broken… I can remember them burning me with hot instruments… placing stuff inside me… almost what I would call a cattle prod”

Judge Urbom “Done by Larry King at his direction?”

Bonacci: “At his direction.”

“If they wanted to get something passed in the legislature, he would put some people that were against it in a compromising position, by using us boys and girls.”³⁷⁷

One of the men in Washington that Paul Bonacci claimed abused him is Democratic Senator Barney Frank. Bonacci was also taken on the very same midnight tours of the White House hosted by Craig Spence that journalist Paul Rodriguez wrote about in the Washington Times, as a child. He claimed that immediately after the tours of the White House, he was taken to another place to be sexually abused.³⁷⁸

375 Court Transcripts, “Paul Bonacci vs. Lawrence E. King”

376 Ibid.

377 Ibid.

378 Ibid.

* * * *

The Grand Jury Coverup

Before his untimely death, Gary Caradori had compiled a leads list of 271 victims of sexual abuse in the Franklin area, though his death precluded interviewing most, and others recanted their stories under pressure from Federal authorities, often accompanied by the threat of jail time for perjury. Along with Paul Bonacci, the investigation proceeded with three other primary witnesses, Troy Boner, Danny King (no relation to Larry), and Alisha Owens.

Both Boner and Owens recounted tales, after passing multiple state-sponsored lie detector tests,³⁷⁹of attending hundreds of parties hosted by Larry King where they were abused by King and other prominent men in Lincoln and Omaha. The three would repeatedly corroborate each other in interviews taken under oath by Gary Caradori, initially without knowledge of each others participation in the investigation.³⁸⁰ Most of the victims claimed that they were used to transport drugs across state lines, at the demand of Larry King and Alan Baer, a prominent Omaha millionaire.

Gary Caradori once followed a lead of Alisha Owens where she claimed that she was often abused at The French Café in Omaha. He talked to the former manager on the telephone, Sheila McGuire, who told Gary that:

“We had parties in my apartment above the French Cafe. Larry King would wine and dine potential investors downstairs at the Cafe. When the French Cafe closed about 1 AM, King and his man called Parking Lot Bob-who worked for him (and was our coke connection) – would bring people upstairs to my place. If Larry King investors wanted drugs, booze, children or hookers (male or female) we’d get them. While these guests of Kings took their pleasures with the kids or whoever, King would sit and watch while he drank, did coke and played with his young boys….

One time, when this guy Irv from NYC wanted Sandra who was about 12 or 13 years old and getting her 1st period, Larry intervened when Sandra refused. King pulled out a roll of $100.00 bills and gave Sandra 5 of them. King then pulled out a small gram of coke and gave that to Sandra. Sandra finally agreed and went off to bed with Irv. King took good care of the local and out of town high rollers. If you had the money to invest at Franklin, King would cater to your most deranged perversion.

And, let me tell you another thing. The boys in the board rooms around Omaha are shitting in their Brogans. If this case gets cracked open the list of involved will read like Who’s Who. King and his crew have ruined a lot of childrens’ lives.”³⁸¹

The New York Times confirmed that both Federal and State investigators were given thousands of files regarding sexual abuse from children and testimonies from people involved in the foster care and education system.³⁸² What happened next is amazing. Instead of indictments of the accused perpetrators to develop cases against them, both Douglas County and Federal Grand Juries ordered the thousands of files to be sealed, declined to interview dozens of witnesses, and then brought charges of perjury against Alisha Owens.³⁸³

Both Grand Juries concluded that Troy Boner and Alisha Owens had indeed been abused, but claimed that the adults they testified against were innocent! Alisha Owens was later found guilty of perjury, and sentenced to between 9 and 15 years. She ended up spending two years in solitary confinement, more than any other woman in Nebraska history, and a clear message to other victims: Stay silent.³⁸⁴

“This is unprecedented, probably in the history of the United States. If the children are not telling the truth, particularly if they have been abused, they need help, medical attention. You don’t throw them in jail!” – Dr. Judianne Densen-Gerber, a lawyer, psychiatrist and nationally prominent specialist on child abuse, during her visit to Nebraska in December 1990.³⁸⁵

On the same day that Alisha Owens was convicted of perjury, the charges against Paul Bonacci, who told a very similar story, were dropped.³⁸⁶ Perhaps they did not want certain testimony to come to trial, such as Bonacci’s claim that Larry King would send limousines to Offutt Air Force Base and pick up CIA agents for his parties.³⁸⁷

The Grand Jury trial was a mockery of justice, where the state-appointed attorney Samuel Van Pelt vigorously attacked the charges and mocked the allegations of the defendants. It has to be noted that a Grand Jury is a special type of proceeding where the attorney chooses all of the witnesses and what evidence is presented; there is no presentation of the defense or cross examination. A former Chief Judge of New York State once quipped that a special prosecutor could persuade a grand jury to “indict a ham sandwich.”³⁸⁸

There are shocking irregularities with the Grand Jury proceedings. First, it never called Larry King to testify. In fact, the evidence of child abuse and child pornography has never been presented against King in any court of law. One member of the Douglas County Grand Jury claimed that the Van Pelt helped write the final report, which is illegal.

The report contained some very peculiar statements, such as “children do have the right to expect that if they exhibit reasonable behavior, they will not be abused.” (Emphasis added). It also contained blatant lies, such as the claim that Paul Bonacci’s doctor said that Bonacci was not capable of the truth, even though not only was the doctor not called to testify, he said elsewhere that he believed Bonacci’s story.³⁸⁹

Owen’s attorney, Henry Rosenthal, found that the evidence shown to the Grand Jury was deliberately tampered with. The video testimony taken by Gary Caradori was edited to remove sections where Troy Boner and Alisha Owens corroborated each others claims.³⁹⁰ The lawyer representing originally Owens, Boner and (Danny) King originally claimed to have had over 100 clients who had suffered sexual abuse in relation to King and Boys Town, but then later claimed that their testimonies were all fabrications, only months before admitting she had an affair with an FBI agent who had bullied Troy Boner into temporarily recanting his testimony.³⁹¹

There is also the curious trend of upward mobility for a group of men who were instrumental in rigging the Grand Juries:³⁹²

1. US Magistrate Richard Kopf, who deposited Lawrence King in a federal psychiatric hospital so he wouldn’t have to appear before the grand juries, and signed off on the FBI’s federal search warrant of Alisha Owen’s prison cell, is now a US District Court Judge.

2. Thomas Thalken, Assistant US Attorney for District of Nebraska, who prosecuted the federal grand jury in Nebraska is now a US Magistrate.

3. Gerald Moran, who was the Douglas County Deputy Attorney who prosecuted the Alisha Owen trial is now a Douglas County District Judge.

4. Robert Sigler, who was the Douglas County Deputy Attorney who prosecuted Alisha Owen throughout her multiple appeals, is now an Assistant US Attorney for the District of Nebraska.

379 Discovery Channel, “Conspiracy of Silence”

380 Caradori’s videotaped testimony is available here.

381 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup.” PDF available here.

382 New York Times, “Omaha Grand Jury Sees Hoax in Lurid Tales,” July 29, 1990

383 Salem News, “America’s Greatest Child Sex Scandal: Boys Town in Lincoln, Nebraska,” December 29, 2012

384 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup.” PDF available here.

385 Ibid.

386 Nick Bryant, “The Franklin Scandal: A Story of Powerbrokers, Child Abuse and Betrayal”. Nick Bryant is a celebrated investigative journalist who spent nearly a decade researching the Franklin case, traveling over 40,000 miles and compiling the most complete accounting of events to date. Unfortunately, I have been unable to find a freely available copy on the internet. You should buy this book if any, however, because 50% of the proceeds are being donated to organizations that are fighting child abuse.

387 Bridget Howe, “If The West Falls,” Excerpt Available Here.

388 The Economist, “The ham sandwich standard ,” February 28, 2014

389 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup.” PDF available here.

390 Discovery Channel, “Conspiracy of Silence”

391 Nick Bryant

392 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup.” PDF available here.

* * * *

Troy Boner

Troy Boner had recounted his testimony during this period, after receiving threats that he himself would become the victim of perjury charges. However, in 1993 he submitted an affidavit detailing his intimidation and stating unequivocally that his testimony as well as those of his peers were truthful.

“I lied because I truly believed and still do believe that it was a situation where I must either ‘…lie or die’ and at the insistence primarily of the Federal Bureau of Investigation officials who were dealing with me at that time…” – Troy Boner’s Affidavit³⁹³

Boner repeated the allegations that the Chief of Police Robert Wadmann and the Omaha Heraldeditor Harold Andersen were primary players in his abuse and the abuse of his peers. He recounts the various tactics the FBI used in his intimidation, including alluding to harm that may come about to a family member if he persisted in telling his story. Shortly after these threats, Troy’s brother Shawn was found dead from a gunshot wound. The official story was a game of Russian Roulette.³⁹⁴ Troy cites this as a primary motivating factor in coming forward with the truth in his affidavit.

“But, maybe the most important thing any honest investigator should do is to ask me, Troy Boner, or any of the other kids such as Alisha or Paul Bonacci, to take polygraph, lie detector tests SIDE BY SIDE ON THE SAME QUESTIONS WITH THE PEOPLE WE ARE ACCUSING OF THESE THINGS. Example, ask Alan Baer if he shot mainline drugs into me and if he is a major drug dealer and if he had sex with me. Ask Eugene Mahoney if he met me at a bookstore in Council Bluffs and used to regularly pay me to have sex with him as a boy. Ask [redacted] to take a polygraph test on whether he is a big time drug dealer.” – Troy Boner’s Affidavit (Emphasis retained)

The polygraph tests never happened. In 2004, Troy Boner entered an Omaha hospital visibly shaken and adamant that he was being targeted because of his testimony. The next day, he was found in a hospital room dead, drugged and beaten.³⁹⁵ The timing might be related to the reelection campaign of George W. Bush, who multiple victims claimed had attended Larry King’s parties. Troy would round out a ‘suspicious death’ list that had recently reached 15 names, including:³⁹⁶

1. Troy Boner

2. Shawn Boner, Troy’s brother, found shot in the head shortly after Troy was to testify before court. The official explanation of his death was ruled to be a game of ‘Russian roulette’.

3. Bill Baker, associate of Larry King and alleged to be involved in the production of child pornography.

4. Gary Caradori and his eight year old son, Andrew, killed in a plane crash.

5. Newt Copple, a primary informant of Caradori, was 70 when he ‘died in his sleep’ but exhibited no health problems before his death.

6. Clare Howard, the secretary of Alan Baer, the wealthy Omaha businessman who was alleged to be a prime member of the child abuse ring. Also ‘died in her sleep.’

7. Mike Lewis, former caregiver of victim-witness Loretta Smith. Death attributed to ‘severe diabetic reaction’ at the age of 32.

8. Joe Malek, associate of King, died from a gunshot which was ruled a suicide.

9. Aaron Owen, the brother of victim-witness Alisha Owen, died in his jail cell hours before Alisha was supposed to testify, ruled a suicide.

10. Charlie Rodgers, alleged sexual partner of Larry King, died of a shotgun wound to the head, ruled a suicide.

11. Bill Skoleski, Omaha police officer said to be secretly keeping a file on Larry King, died of a heart attack.

12. Kathleen Sorenson, foster parent of children who had escaped the Webb family, and outspoken activist on raising awareness of the abuse of the children she cared for.

13. Curtis Tucker, an associate of Larry King, who allegedly jumped out the window of a Holiday Inn in Omaha.

14. Harmon Tucker, a school superintendent in Omaha.

393 Troy Boner’s Affidavit

394 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup.” PDF available here.

395 Ibid.

396 Ibid.

* * * *

Conspiracy of Silence

In 1993, a television station in Yorkshire, England traveled to Franklin to uncover the truth about the tale of child abuse in Franklin, working in tandem with the Discovery Channel. It was called “Conspiracy of Silence” and the very day it was set to air, it was pulled. No explanation has ever been given, though there are rumors that an anonymous person paid the Discovery Channel $500,000 to revoke the television rights to the film.

It would only be unofficially released two years later, when someone who helped produce the video and felt it was so important it needed to be public, leaked a rough draft from the copy room to attorney and former State Senator John DeCamp. It is now widely available for viewing online.

Overall, eight high profile Omaha figures would be accused of sexual assault, with testimonies corroborated between victims. They were:³⁹⁷

1. Larry King

2. Robert Wadman, Omaha Chief of Police

3. Harold Anderson, recently retired Editor of the Omaha World-Herald

4. Alan Baer, wealthy businessman

5. Deward Finch, Superintendent of schools.

6. Peter Citron, media personality

7. Judge Theodore Carson

8. PJ Morgan, Mayor of Omaha

Of these men, only one would be convicted of child abuse, Peter Citron, on an unrelated breakout of pedophilia claims which launched a separate investigation. Before the allegations leading to Citron’s arrest broke, he was threatening to sue John DeCamp for naming him as a child abuser in a memo sent to the Omaha press.

How could such a massive and orchestrated coverup take place? It involved the FBI withholding all sensitive files, including explicit videos and pictures of the relationships between King and his associates and young children. It involved a campaign of denial by the Omaha Police Department, who’s chief was a primary member of the child abuse ring, and a disinformation campaign by Nebraska’s media, who also had important members implicated in the ring.

It involved zealous FBI agents who were self-expressed ‘good friends’ with Robert Wadman. And it involved a campaign of suspicious deaths designed to silence testimony. Lastly, and perhaps most importantly, it involved an American public unwilling to believe that powerful men could be implicated in child abuse, child prostitution and drug running.

397 Discovery Channel, “Conspiracy of Silence.”

* * * *

The Dutroux Affair

In the summer of 1995, a wave of disappearances of young girls in Belgium grabbed national headlines. The series of kidnappings would continue through the next year, with the Belgium BOB (FBI equivalent) unable to develop any leads.

Then in the summer of ’96, an anonymous tip about a suspicious white van led investigators to the doorsteps of Marc Dutroux, a known pedophile who had only recently been released from prison after serving three years of a 13 year sentence, despite warnings from various professionals and even his own mother that he was likely to be a repeat offender.³⁹⁸ The man who let Dutroux out of prison, Justice Minister Melchior Wathelet, would soon be promoted to serve as a judge at the European Court of Justice at the Hague.³⁹⁹

Various stories soon emerged in the press regarding how the BOB had repeatedly, and suspiciously, failed to implicate Dutroux during the previous years. For example, BOB officer Rene Michaux once searched Dutroux’s house, but failed to investigate screams he heard, instead believing the tale that the voices were coming from children outside. Nor did he find the odd construction of Dutroux’s basement, shaped in an L with one wall much newer than the others, reason for inquiry.⁴⁰⁰

At the time, Dutroux, though unemployed and receiving welfare from the state, owned seven homes and lived quite lavishly from his involvement in selling children and child porn.⁴⁰¹Michaux ignored reports from an informant who claimed to have been made an offer by Dutroux to kidnap young girls in exchange for about €4000.⁴⁰²

He once had in his possession a video tape of Dutroux constructing his makeshift basement dungeon, and raping a 14 year old girl, but the tape was returned to Dutroux’s wife, apparently unviewed.⁴⁰³ Michaux’s failures likely directly led to the death of two girls who were held captive by Dutroux at the time of the investigation and reportedly died of starvation.

The arrest of Dutroux did not come until a new lead investigator, Jean-Marc Connorette, was assigned to the case. For the first time, many victims of child abuse and trafficking in Belgium felt that they had someone they could trust, and began to come forward with their stories. The case quickly spiraled to the point where Dutroux was no longer the focus. During the investigation, these victims were each assigned a number, appended after an X.

For example, X1 was first sexually abused at the age of two, at the hands of her grandmother, who owned a hotel frequented by pedophiles. At the age of 4, she was introduced to a ‘pimp’ who would take her out to other locations for abuse and torture. She was diagnosed with Multiple Personality Disorder, now known as Dissociative Identity Disorder.

Even after getting married and moving away at the age of 19, she was never able to fully leave the ‘network’: Occasionally, when her husband was out of town, her old pimp would show up and take her back to places she was abused as a child, and she would be raped.⁴⁰⁴ She named and described in great detail, to a specially assembled police team, the people and places involved in the pedophile ring. Senior judges, one of the country’s most powerful politicians – now dead – and a very influential banker were included.⁴⁰⁵

“The sessions not only involved sex, they included sadism, torture and murder; and again, she described in detail, the place, the victims and how they were killed.” – BBC⁴⁰⁶

X1 and other witnesses recounted being raped by dogs and snakes, and being forced to witness the murders of other children which were captured on video tape.⁴⁰⁷

X1 was quoted as saying:

“In Brussels there was a villa in which a room was set up with built-in cameras. Even in the 1970s these cameras were so discrete that only the people who maintained them and the child prostitutes knew where they were located… Why did I [have] to get those guys clearly in the picture, why was I supposed to get them to hit me and brutally rape me? Why was ‘regular’ sex often not enough?… Blackmail, the word that was never mentioned; I only started to really understand when I was thirteen, fourteen years old…”⁴⁰⁸

The other victims told similar stories, all independent of one another. Most had developed Multiple Personality Disorder, and had been turned over to the ‘network’ by family members. Many accurately and independently verified locations and members of the network who were their abusers.⁴⁰⁹ Perhaps most importantly, they all claimed that high profile members of society were involved.⁴¹⁰

X1 also corroborated that one of Dutroux’s associates, Jean-Michel Nihoul, was instrumental in the abuse parties. Nihoul had significant connections among Belgian political and financial elite, and later confessed to organizing an orgy at a Belgian chateau attended by government officials, described by the press as a ‘Policeman’s Orgy’.⁴¹¹ It emerged that Dutroux and Nihoul were part of a long distance child trafficking ring that imported children from Slovakia, among other places. Nihoul would later be found not guilty, a decision made by the judges who overruled a ‘guilty’ verdict by the jury.

Just as the investigation was heating up and began to show promise, it was completely dismantled from higher powers. Jean-Marc Conorrette was dismissed from the case, which drew huge criticism from across the nation.⁴¹² It prompted the event known as the ‘White March’, in which 300,000 Belgians from the nation of just 10 million took to the streets to protest the dismissal.^{413 414} Conorette would later break down in tears in court while describing the death threats he received when he was still involved with the investigation.⁴¹⁵

A second change that greatly affected the proceedings was the introduction of a strict hierarchy to the examinations of the witnesses, which was previously undertaken by BOB officers working independently, overseen by Gendarmerie Commandant Jean-Luc Duterme. Duterme would conduct abusive interrogations which emotionally devastated the witnesses who were suffering from Multiple Personality Disorder.

In addition, the prosecutor that replaced Conorette, Jacques Langlois, deliberately obfuscated the investigation. He sent police out on false tips and helped spread disinformation in the media. Jean-Marc Connorete once described how he felt about the leads that Langlois would end up investigating:

“I regularly and much earlier complained about those terrible circumstances in which I had to work in the Dutroux case… We continually received information about all kinds of bizarre leads. Those then received a lot of media attention, but to us meant nothing but time loss… Just think about the Abrasax case and the digs in Jumet. If I remember correctly, the first leads in those two cases were already put under my nose in the very beginning of the investigation. Afterwards precisely Abrasax and Jumet were used by the media as an argument to say that the whole investigation was manipulated and pointed towards false leads. I experienced the same thing in the Cools case, in which the police began to manipulate and was wholeheartedly supported by the media.” –Humo (Belgian publication)⁴¹⁶

Fuel to the fire would be added when a highly regarded childrens activist, Marie France Botte, claimed that prosecutors were sitting on a politically sensitive list of high profile customers of Dutroux’s thousands of video tapes.⁴¹⁷

Marc Verwilghen, the Flemish parliamentarian who became the most popular politician in the country after leading the inquiry into Dutroux, claimed that many in the Belgian establishment, including heads of government, refused to cooperate, and sought to stifle and ridicule his report. He claimed that magistrates and police were officially told to not answer certain questions, in what he described as a ‘characteristic smothering operation’. He was further quoted as saying “For me, the Dutroux affair is a question of organized crime.”⁴¹⁸ A parliamentary panel revealed the names of 30 government officials it said were complicit in the hiding of Dutroux’s misdeeds, none have been punished.⁴¹⁹

As the trial came to an end in 2004 and faded from the public spotlight, Dutroux adamantly claimed that he was not a lone pedophile but instead was acting on behalf of a large pedophile ring.⁴²⁰

“Marc Dutroux insisted yesterday that he was not a “lone predator” who kidnapped and raped young girls but part of a wider paedophile ring… Dutroux portrayed himself as a victim, a “puppet in a show trial” who had to be put away to “hide the truth” and serve the interests of “organised corruption”. Only 10% of the case had been examined, he said, asking why independent-minded policemen had been removed from the investigating team. He urged police to follow up clues he said would prove he was working for a network which kidnapped girls to be sold into prostitution.”

Today, many Belgians have expressed sorrow that most of the details of the evidence will never be known. The files are sealed, with the presiding judge claiming he saw no reason to reopen them.

The Dutroux Affair follows a shockingly similar pattern to the events in Franklin, Nebraska. The local police have no interest in uncovering the child abuse ring and even go to seemingly absurd lengths to keep it a secret. The courts are hostile towards the witnesses and the trials are deliberately obfuscated. Charges of perjury are brought against those who refuse to recant their stories. The Federal investigators withheld proof of the claims of the witnesses, including the names of high profile members of the child abuse ring and visual evidence of their crimes.

398 BBC, “Profile: Marc Dutroux,” June 17, 2004

399 Wikipedia article on Melchior Wathelet.

400 Fox News, “Court keeps convicted pedophile killer Marc Dutroux in prison in Belgium,” February 18, 2013

401 NBC, “Belgium Begins High-Profile Pedophile Trial”, March 1, 2004

402 TruTV’s Crime Library, “Marc Dutroux, A Pedophile and Child-Killer.”

403 The Guardian, “Police admit Dutroux video bungle,” June 17, 1999

404 Marie-Jeanne Van Heeswyck, Annemie Bulté and Douglas De Coninck ,The X Dossiers, 1999

405 BBC, “Regina Louf’s Testimony,” May 2, 2002

406 Ibid.

407 Regina Louf, “Zwijgen is voor daders : de getuigenis van X1.” Unfortunately, I have been unable to find an English version of this book.

408 Ibid.

409 Annemie Bulte, “de X-Dossiers: Wat Belgie Niet Mocht Weten Over de Zaak-Dutroux.”

410 New York Times, “275,000 in Belgium Protest Handling of Child Sex Scandal,” October 21, 1996

411 The Telegraph, “Belgians Shocked By Tale of Policeman’s Orgy,” March 16, 1990

412 New York Times, “Belgian Hero Dismissed,” October 15, 1996

413 New York Times, “275,000 in Belgium Protest Handling of Child Sex Scandal,” October 21, 1996

414 Wikipedia article on the White March

415 The Telegraph, “Judge tells of murder plots to block Dutroux investigation,” March 5, 2004

416 Humo, “War in Neufchateau: examining magistrate Connerotte speaks about the Dutroux dossier for the first time,” December 3, 2002.

417 Los Angeles Times, “Kidnap Deaths Plunge Belgium Into Guilt,” September 2, 1996

418 The Guardian, “Cover-up claims revive sex scandal,” April 21, 1999

419 Los Angeles Times, “Grisly Crimes Undermine Belgian Unity,” January 3, 1998

420 The Guardian, “Dutroux insists he was part of paedophile ring,” June 11, 2004

* * * *

The British Aristocracy Pedophocracy

“Officers in London were inquiring into allegations made by a teenage rent boy that a Cabinet minister had been abusing him. The youth claimed to be one of a number of boys regularly having sex with rich and powerful men in the 1980s – some of whom would fly to the illegal orgies from Europe.

As well as the Cabinet minister – who is still alive – he pointed the finger at judges, European bigwigs and senior civil servants. He told his story to detectives, who are understood to have received other allegations against the minister. But a former detective who worked on the case revealed they were suddenly told to halt the probe.

The furious ex-policeman said: “It wasn’t that we ran out of leads but it reached a point where a warning to stop came. It was a case of ‘get rid of everything, never say a word to anyone’. It was made very clear to me that to continue asking questions would jeopardise my career.” – The Sunday Daily Star⁴²¹

The passing of Sir Jimmy Savile in October 2011, entertainer, socialite and personal friend of the royal family, opened the floodgates of a myriad of revelations, with hundreds of victims coming forward claiming they were abused at the hands of Savile in esteemed institutions such as BBC and various hospitals. It seemed that many people where aware of the transgressions, but no one acted. Years later, new revelations are coming to light on a weekly basis. One interesting story was published in January of 2013 which read, “Jimmy Savile was part of satanic ring”.⁴²²

“Dr Sinason told the Sunday Express she first spoke to the victim in 1992. “She had been a patient at Stoke Mandeville in 1975 when Savile was a regular visitor.

She recalled being led into a room that was filled with candles on the lowest level of the hospital, somewhere that was not regularly used by staff. Several adults were there, including Jimmy Savile who, like the others, was wearing a robe and a mask.

She recognised him because of his distinctive voice and the fact that his blond hair was protruding from the side of the mask. He was not the leader but he was seen as important because of his fame.

She was molested, raped and beaten and heard words that sounded like ‘Ave Satanas’, a Latinised version of ‘Hail Satan’, being chanted. There was no mention of any other child being there and she cannot remember how long the attack lasted but she was left extremely frightened and shaken.”

Allegations of powerful pedophile rings in Britain were nothing new. Over 30 years ago, in 1981, Tory MP Geoffrey Dickens warned parliament against a pedophile ring he had uncovered, claiming that the network involved “big, big names – people in positions of power, influence and responsibility” and threatened to expose them in Parliament.⁴²³

Dickens made waves regarding the pedophile ring and dossiers he received for four years in parliament before backing down in the face of harassment and death threats. It seems that no one took him seriously at the time, but new evidence shows that his claims had merit: In January 2013, Scotland Yard reopened their investigation.

“Last month Metropolitan Police began Operation Fernbridge into allegations that residents of a childrens home in Richmond, west London, were taken to the nearby Elm Guest House in Barnes, where they were abused. Pornography involving adults having sex with children was allegedly shot at the property and then circulated commercially.

Sir Peter was among the visitors to the property. Others, according to a list seized by Scotland Yard last month, were the late Liberal MP Cyril Smith, the former Russian spy Sir Anthony Blunt, a Sinn Fein politician, a Labour MP, and several Conservative politicians.

After neighbours complained about the arrival of children, the police raided the guesthouse in 1982 but the operation was mysteriously cut short. A 2003 investigation also failed.” – The Independent⁴²⁴

Over 30 years later, the very first man that Dickens accused, Sir Peter Haymann, MI6 operative, was arrested. The new inquiry was prompted by MP Tom Watson, who has requested the original dossier collected by Dickens, but Scotland Yard has been unable to produce it.

The revelations of Jimmy Savile has opened new opportunities for investigations of former cases.By December 12, 2012, the number of victims who had come forward claiming abuse at the hands of Jimmy Savile had reached 450, spanning dozens of childrens homes and hospitals.⁴²⁵ Two famous childrens homes who were each subject to their own vast child abuse scandals in the last decade, Haut de la Garenne on Jersey Island, and Bryn Estyn Boys Home in Wrexham, North Wales, have had a series of fresh allegations in the wake of the Savile revelations.

In Wrexham, North Wales, the tale is a familiar one. Boys from the Bryn Estyn home would be taken to parties throughout the city where they acted as child prostitutes for socialites and were severely sexually abused.

“Over the years, twenty seven police inquiries failed to disclose the scale of the alleged abuse. Thirteen reports by social services went unpublished. Several journalists reached out for the truth and ended up scorched by libel actions. When police finally launched a major inquiry, in 1991, they secured the conviction of only four care workers and concluded that there was no evidence of a paedophile ring. Clwyd County Council then commissioned its own independent inquiry but decreed that its report could not be published.” – The Guardian⁴²⁶

Celebrated investigative journalist Nick Davies, writing for The Guardian, nails the concept and motivation behind these various sex abuse scandals with the following statement:

“Power is the fabric of a paedophile ring, essential first to subjugate the children, whose passivity is essential for the adults’ indulgence; and second, where possible, to neutralise the authorities who might otherwise frustrate its activities.”

Writing about a new tribunal launched into the Wrexham case in 1997, Davies noted that over 300 men and women had come forward, naming 148 different abusers.

The official Wrexham inquiry concluded that widespread abuse of boys did indeed occur at Bryn Estyn and other nearby childrens homes, and that dozens of potential inquiries were completely suppressed by administrators.

“During the period under review there was a paedophile ring in the Wrexham and Chester areas in the sense that there were a number of male persons, many of them known to each other, who were engaged in paedophile activities and were targeting young males in their middle teens. The evidence does not establish that they were solely or mainly interested in persons in care but such youngsters were particularly vulnerable to their approaches.”⁴²⁷

After the Savile revelations, 76 new victims came forward in North Wales, and the investigation has been reopened. The victims claimed that the 1997 inquiry only examined a small fraction of the abuse allegations.⁴²⁸ The Independent revealed in 2012 further details of a coverup:

“A damning report that laid bare the North Wales child abuse scandal might have aired the issue of sex attacks on children in care nearly half a decade before an official judicial inquiry in 2000. Instead copies of the report were ordered to be destroyed because the council that commissioned it feared it might be sued, The Independent on Sunday can reveal. Only a handful remain, including one obtained by this newspaper.” – The Independent

They claim the following details:

• “The then newly appointed North Wales chief constable, who was uncontactable yesterday, refused to meet them or help with access to the police major-incident database. We were disappointed at the apparent impossibility of obtaining a breakdown of data. We are unable to identify the overall extent of the allegations received by the police in the many witness statements which they took.”

• Some 130 boxes of material handed over by the council to the police were not made available to the panel.

• The council did not allow the inquiry to place a notice in the local press seeking information. “This was considered to be unacceptable to the insurers,” says the report…

• “There were numerous claims and suggestions that senior public figures including the police and political figures might have been involved in the abuse of young people,” the report said. – The Independent⁴²⁹

After his death, Jimmy Savile would be repeatedly linked to the North Wales home. One victim claimed to have been repeatedly raped by the deputy head of the home, Peter Howarth, while Savile watched for entertainment.⁴³⁰

“Howarth pulled down my pyjama bottoms in front of Savile. I was helpless as Jimmy watched. He thought it funny entertainment. This happened to a number of boys.”

According to “Ben”, Savile would ask him: “What do you want me to do? Can I fix it for you.” The victim added: “He kept on looking at me and smiling and laughing. Then he started rubbing my leg. After that I went to bed but he had other children brought up to him.” – The Telegraph

The phrase “Can I fix it for you” is a sick play on Jimmy Savile’s popular TV show, ‘Jim’ll Fix It’, where Savile would put underprivileged or sick kids into contact with celebrities, or take them on trips, as a psuedo-charitable charade. This put Savile in contact with hundreds of vulnerable children. Peter Howarth was one of the few people convicted during the original North Wales child abuse inquiries.

“Another victim of Bryn Estyn was Steve Messham, who claims he was repeatedly abused as a child by a senior member of the conservative party, as well as others. Yesterday he told Channel 4 News that he passed photographs of children being abused, including himself, to the police but they failed to act. He also said the men who abused him as a teenager frequently threatened him, saying: ‘If you tell anyone, I’ll have you killed.’” – The Telegraph

The Haut de la Garrene childrens home in Jersey has similar evidence of a massive coverup. Jersey, not subject to European Union regulations, has long been a haven of tax dodgers and secrecy. In 2008, more than 200 victims came forward with tales of rape and torture.⁴³¹ It soon became clear that many of the accused were Tory officials and aides, prompting a swift response by Prime Minister David Cameron to address the claims.⁴³²

After his death, it was revealed that Jimmy Savile was a regular visitor of the childrens home.⁴³³

In 2008, after being replaced as the lead of the investigation, Police Chief Lenny Harper blasted the road blocks he encountered during his tenure and accused an ‘Old Boys’ network of obstructing his investigation.

“In his most outspoken criticism of the Jersey authorities, Mr Harper told theTelegraph: “I can quite clearly say that the investigation is being held up. There are people on the island who just don’t want us going down the route of this inquiry.

“Mr Harper, who handed over the reins of the investigation to his successor on Thursday and officially leaves the Jersey force at the end of the month, also revealed fresh details of why he is so convinced that someone deliberately concealed the bones and teeth of five children, perhaps after murdering them…

Mr Harper has repeatedly said that because some of the 100 bone fragments had been cut, and because the 65 milk teeth found at the home had roots on them, meaning they did not come out naturally, children were either murdered or their bodies were illegally concealed.” – The Telegraph⁴³⁴

Jimmy Savile pictured with 30 children from the Haut de la Garrene Home

Jimmy Savile was also linked to Haut de la Garenne. It was revealed in October, 2012 that his name had come up numerous times in a police investigation four years earlier but he was not investigated further.⁴³⁵ Lenny Harper, the lead investigator into the Garenne home, told the Telegraph in 2012:

“Savile chose his victims with great care; vulnerable and often troubled youngsters many in care homes. If they complained they were labeled troublemakers, or brutally put down. We know from court cases and statements made to my team [during the 2008 inquiry] that children in Jersey care homes were ‘loaned out’ to members of the yachting fraternity and other prominent citizens on the pretense of recreational trips but during which they were savagely abused and often raped.

“When these children complained they were beaten and locked in cellars [at Haut de la Garenne], which the Jersey authorities denied existed in 2008, but which can still be seen on YouTube footage. What chance did they have? This would have been the perfect hunting ground for Savile. The great and good of Jersey fawn over anyone with even loose connections to British royalty. Saville would have been a VIP to them and children would not have stood a dog’s chance of complaining about him. It would have been so easy for him.” – The Telegraph⁴³⁶

Regarding the statement about the ‘yachting fraternity’, Rupert Murdoch’s famous tabloid News of the World launched an investigation and found that children were “loaned out to rich pedophile yachtsmen”.⁴³⁷ They alleged that Jimmy Savile personally delivered the boys to the club.

Jimmy Savile is certainly a weird character. He once gave an interview to Esquire Magazine where he stated:

“I guess I am like Forrest Gump… I am like a sewing machine needle that goes in here and goes in there, but I am also the eminence grise: the grey, shadowy figure in the background. The thing about me is I get things done and I work under cover.”⁴³⁸

Perhaps he is referring to his close connections with the United Kingdom’s royalty. Savile was known to have acted as a ‘marriage counselor’ between Prince Charles and Princess Diana in the ’80s. His weird behavior was noted by the press, where he was reported to greet Prince Charles’ assistants by “taking their hands and rubbing his lips all the way up their arms.”⁴³⁹

Jimmy Savile had numerous private meetings with former Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher, documents released in 2012 revealed. They detailed how Savile had petitioned Thatcher to change a law that would allow easier tax deductions for Saviles involvement with the Stoke Mandeville hospital (where Savile was alleged to have abused girls during Satanic rituals). BBCexplained that the documents showed that Thatcher was favorable to Savile’s petition, and had several private meetings including lunch, though she was adamant that his name never be mentioned.⁴⁴⁰ Later it was revealed that Prince Charles himself signed on to be the ‘Patron of the Appeal’.⁴⁴¹

As of January 2013, police have confirmed that at least 22 sexual abuse offenses by Jimmy Savile had taken place at the Stoke Mandeville hospital.⁴⁴² A 2009 police interview with Savile shows that all he had to do was threaten legal action against the police, and the claims of abuse against him were dropped. At one point he told the officers, in reference to the Stoke Mandeville hospital, “I own it.”⁴⁴³

The connections between Savile and the UK elite are certainly cause for suspicion. In 2007, Prince Charles sent Savile a Christmas Card which read: “Jimmy, with affectionate greetings from Charles. Give my love to your ladies in Scotland.”⁴⁴⁴

Perhaps the most disturbing part of the Savile tale is that everyone knew. One senior police officer told BBC that “We know Jimmy likes them young, he’s got friends in high places.”⁴⁴⁵A retired Leeds policeman has claimed that “there wasn’t a copper in the city who didn’t know Savile was a pervert”.⁴⁴⁶ BBC television and radio legend Sir Terry Wogan claimed that Savile’s abuse was an ‘open secret’ and that it was common knowledge in the industry what he was up to.⁴⁴⁷

“David Nicolson, 67, said he reported the incident to his bosses at the corporation in 1988 but was rebuffed and simply told: “That’s Jimmy”. He told The Sun newspaper: “I was revolted by his behaviour. They just shrugged it off, saying, ‘Yeah, yeah — that’s the way it goes’.”

“Everyone knew what was going on. That includes senior BBC people — chiefs at the highest levels. “There were always girls in Jimmy’s dressing room. Everyone would have known about it — all the hair and make-up people, the wardrobe, show directors, producers.” – The Telegraph⁴⁴⁸

New revelations regarding Jimmy Savile and other pedophiles in esteemed institutions are being published every month. Hopefully the investigation trail will eventually expose just how deep the corruption goes.

[Editor’s Note] The powerfully revealing 60 Minutes Australia program “Spies, Lords, and Predators,” aired in July 2015, courageously revealed undeniable evidence that top politicians and the second in charge of the UK’s MI6 intelligence service were involved in this pedophile network. This landmark program is a must watch and share for all who want to join in transforming our world.

421 The Sunday Daily Star, “Tory Paedo Cover-up,” October 28, 2012

422 Express UK, “Jimmy Savile was part of satanic ring,” January 13, 2013

423 The Independent, “Tory MP warned of powerful paedophile ring 30 years ago,” February 22, 2013

424 Ibid.

425 BBC, “Jimmy Savile abuse: Number of alleged victims reaches 450,” December 12, 2012

426 The Guardian, “Secrecy imposed on the exposure of alleged child abuse,” October 1997

427 The Telegraph, “Waterhouse Inquiry: recommendations and conclusions,” November 6, 2012

428 The Record UK, “North Wales abuse: 76 new allegations arise in investigation into a historic paedophile ring at 18 care homes,” April 29, 2013

429 The Independent, “The Jillings report: How the truth about North Wales child abuse scandal was suppressed,” November 11, 2012

430 The Telegraph, “Jimmy Savile linked to North Wales child abuse scandal,” November 7, 2012

431 The Telegraph, “Jimmy Savile: ‘He was the tip of the iceberg’,” October 19, 2012

432 The Guardian, “Tory child sex abuse ring claim: Cameron races to control scandal,” November 5, 2012

433 BBC, “Jimmy Savile named in Jersey children’s home abuse inquiry,” October 2, 2012

434 The Telegraph, “Jersey abuse case: ‘Old boy network’ is obstructing police investigation,” August 8, 2008

435 The Daily Mail, “Savile pictured at the Jersey House of Horrors: Paedophile DJ is surrounded by children at care home where 192 ‘suffered abuse‘,” October 16, 2012

436 The Telegraph, “Jimmy Savile: ‘He was the tip of the iceberg’,” October 19, 2012

437 News of the World, “JERSEY:Children were loaned to rich paedophile yachtsmen.”

438 Daily Mail, “Jim the fixer: Is Jimmy Savile just a fantasist … or is the truth even stranger than fiction?”

439 The Guardian, “Jimmy Savile caused concern with behaviour on visits to Prince Charles,” October 29, 2012

440 BBC, “Jimmy Savile sought Margaret Thatcher Stoke Mandeville help,” December 28, 2012

441 The Daily Star, “CHARLES’ LINKS TO SAVILE,” May 12, 2013

442 BBC, “Jimmy Savile scandal: Stoke Mandeville inquiry continues,” January 11, 2013

443 The Guardian, “Jimmy Savile: transcript reveals ‘policy’ used to halt abuse claims,” October 16, 2013

444 The Telegraph, “Sir Jimmy Savile: Prince Charles’s love for Savile’s ‘ladies’,” October 4, 2012

445 BBC, “‘Everyone knew’ about Jimmy Savile, former officer says,” October 17, 2013

446 The Telegraph, “How far did police go to protect Jimmy Savile?,” October 18, 2013

447 The Mirror, “Sir Terry Wogan speaks of his hatred of Jimmy Savile and says his crimes were open secret at BBC,” October 5, 2013

448 The Telegraph, “Jimmy Savile: BBC did nothing when director caught him in the act,” October 12, 2012

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. How can a pedophile network infiltrate or compromise the authorities who would otherwise be responsible for exposing them and bringing them to justice?

2. Why is pedophilia so rampant among the elite?

3. How could Jimmy Savile and Larry King maintain their abuse when so many of their associates were aware?

4. Why does the reported child abuse go well beyond sexual acts into sadism and torture?

5. How widespread are these networks?

6. Is there collusion or connections between large pedophile rings?

7. Just how high up does the corruption go in Washington, the UK and Belgium?

* * * *

Chapter XIII: Cults and Child Abuse

* * * *

The Finders

In 1987 the New York Times ran a story about a little known cult called “The Finders”. The first paragraph reads:

“Police officials here said today that six disheveled children found in Tallahassee, Fla., might be the offspring of members of a little known cult, but the officials said they had not ruled out the possibility of kidnapping.”⁴⁴⁹

Who are these suspicious men, and what were they doing with 6 undocumented children, transporting them across the country? Two children who were with the Tallahassee men were found to show signs of sexual abuse.⁴⁵⁰ The Finders had long been a topic of discussion for locals, who were naturally fascinated with the cult that lived amongst them. The Washington City Paper once described the Finders as such:

“In appearance, the Finders—mostly middle-aged men, always in dark suits—wouldn’t be out of place managing a local funeral home. But the behavior of the handful of adherents has people wondering whether they arrived by flying saucer. Townspeople say the Finders constantly walk the streets, following people home and taking extensive notes and pictures. They often appear at local council meetings, never saying a word but simply observing the scene. At other times, they plunder the visitor’s center of brochures, maps, and local travel guides. And they haunt the courthouse, scouring land deeds to find out who owns the local real estate,” –Washington City Paper⁴⁵¹

The Washington City Paper goes on to address the shocking specter of the alleged Satanist practices of the cult, with the startling revelation:

“But among all the cryptic inventory, cops found a photo album entitled “The Execution of Henrietta and Igor,” a series of snapshots depicting berobed adults and children slaughtering goats in a wintry woodscape. One photo depicted giggling toddlers pulling dead kids from a womb (“Baby goats!” ran the caption); another showed a grinning adult presenting a goat’s head to a startled child.”⁴⁵²

One US News and World Report article states:

“The more the police learned about the Finders, the more bizarre they seemed: There were suggestions of child abuse, Satanism, dealing in pornography and ritualistic animal slaughter. None of the allegations was ever proved, however. The child abuse charges against the two men in Tallahassee were dropped.”⁴⁵³

The children were apparently en route to Mexico, to what the children described as a school for ‘smart kids’. It was noted in a Customs Report that the children were unable to accurately identify themselves or their custodians, could not identify the purpose of telephones, toilets or televisions, and were only given food ‘as a reward’.⁴⁵⁴

These shocking developments led to a raid on the Finders compound by the U.S. Customs Service. The report produced after the raid is astounding:

“During the execution of the warrant at 3918/20 W Street., I was able to observe and access the entire building. I saw large quantities of childrens clothing and toys. The clothing consisted of diapers and clothes in the toddler to preschool range. No children were found on the premises.”

“Cursory examination of the documents revealed detailed instructions for obtaining children for unspecified purposes. The instructions included the impregnation of female members of the community known as the Finders, purchasing children, trading and kidnapping.”

“One such telex specifically ordered the purchase of two children in Hong Kong to be arranged through a contact in the Chinese Embassy there. Another telex expressed interest in ‘bank secrecy’ situations. Other documents identified interests in high-tech transfers to the United Kingdom, numerous properties under control of the Finders, a keen interest in terrorism, explosives and evasion of authorities.”

“There was also a set of instructions which appeared to be broadcast via a computer network which advised participants to move ‘the children’ and to keep them moving through different jurisdictions, and instructions on how to avoid police attention.”

“I was able to observe numerous documents which described explicit sexual conduct between members of the community known as Finders. I also saw a large collection of photographs of unidentified persons. Some of the photographs were nudes, believed to be members of Finders. There were numerous photos of children, some nude, at least one of which was a child ‘on display’ and appearing to accent the child’s genitals.”

“One of the officers presented me with a photo album for review. The album contained a series of photos of adults and children dressed in white sheets participating in a ‘blood ritual’. The ritual centered around the execution of at least two goats. The photos portrayed the execution, disembowelment and dismemberment of the goats at the hands of the children. This included the removal of the testes of the male goat, the discovery of the female goats ‘womb’ and the ‘baby goats’ inside the womb, and the presentation of the goat head to one of the children.”

“The warehouse contained a large library, two kitchens, a sauna, hot tub, and a ‘video room’. The video room seemed to be set up as an indoctrination center. It also appeared that the organization had the capability to produce its own videos. There were what appeared to be training areas for the children and what appeared to be an altar set up in a residential area of the warehouse. Many jars of feces and urine were located in this area.” – USCS Report of Investigation Continuation, filed by Special Agent Ramon J. Martinez, March 2, 1987⁴⁵⁵

A follow up report revealed the most shocking detail of the entire Finders case:

“I was advised that all of the passport data had been turned over to the State Department for their investigation. The State Department in turn advised MPD (D.C. Metropolitan Police Department) that all travel and use of passports by the holders of the passports was within the law and no action would be taken. This included travel to Moscow, North Korea and North Vietnam from the late 1950’s to the early 1970’s.

The individual further advised me of circumstances which indicated that the investigation into the Finders had become a CIA internal matter. The MPD report has been classified and is not available for review. I was advised that the FBI had withdrawn from the investigation several weeks prior and that the FBI Foreign Counter Intelligence Division had directed the MPD not to advise the FBI Washington Field Office of anything that had transpired.”⁴⁵⁶

After the Finders investigation became a ‘CIA internal matter’, no action against the Finders was ever taken, and the case has largely faded from public memory. Not everyone was content with the investigation simply ‘ending’. Florida congressman Tom Lewis was quoted as saying:

“’Could our own government have something to do with this Finders organization and turned their backs on these children? That’s what all the evidence points to,” says Lewis. “And there’s a lot of evidence. I can tell you this: We’ve got a lot of people scrambling, and that wouldn’t be happening if there was nothing here.’”⁴⁵⁷

Digging by the media could only produce one confirmed connection: A firm which operated as a ‘front organization’ for the CIA providing officers with computer training employed several members of the Finders. The Washington Times reported:

“Other Customs Service documents and records from the FBI and Metropolitan Police provide indications that the CIA had links to the Finders or at least to some of the group’s members. A Metropolitan Police document dated Feb. 19, 1987, quotes a CIA agent as confirming that his agency was sending its personnel to “a Finders Corp., Future Enterprises, for training in computer operations.” And a later Customs Service report says that the CIA “admitted to owning the Finders organization as a front for a domestic computer training operation but that it had ’gone bad.’”⁴⁵⁸

The CIA has denied any connection to the Finders.

449 New York Times, “Inquiry Spreads on 6 Children and Cult,” February 8, 1987

450 Chicago Tribune, “2 Cult Children Show Signs Of Sex Abuse,” February 9, 1987

451 Washington City Paper, “Finders Keeper,” May 24, 1996

452 Ibid.

453 US News and World Report, “Through a Glass, Very Darkly,” December 19, 1993

454 USCS report available here.

455 Ibid.

456 Ibid.

457 US News and World Report, “Through a Glass, Very Darkly,” December 19, 1993

458 The Washington Times, “CIA tied to cult accused of abuse ; Justice probes links to Finders,” December 17, 1993

* * * *

Presidio

On November 16, 1987, a New York Times article glibly revealed a shocking statistic: in a three year period from 1984 to 1987, over 30 different military bases were rocked by child abuse scandals, including West Point and Fort Dix.⁴⁵⁹ This statement came on the heels of a massive scandal that was taking place in San Francisco, at a military base named Presidio.

“A Federal grand jury in San Francisco spent 10 months investigating abuse allegations surrounding the Presidio center, and almost 100 children were examined for physical or psychological signs of sexual abuse. At least four children were discovered to have chlamydia, a sexually transmitted disease.” –New York Times

The San Jose Mercury described the West Point scandal and its relation to ritual abuse in chilling detail:

“There had been sex abuse cases involving day care centers at several other Army bases. West Point was one of the most serious – until the Presidio. In July 1984, a 3-year-old girl was brought to the emergency room at West Point Hospital with a lacerated vagina. The child told the doctor who examined her that a teacher at the West Point day care center was the one who hurt her…

Children at West Point told stories that would become horrifyingly familiar. They said they had been ritually abused. They said they had had excrement smeared on their bodies and been forced to eat feces and drink urine. They said they were taken away from the day care center and photographed.” – San Jose Mercury News⁴⁶⁰

The Presidio that the San Jose Mercury News and New York Times mentioned is a military base located in San Francisco. It became the subject of one of the strangest and sickening child abuse scandals in American history. In 1987, some parents whose children attended the Presidio day care center began to notice signs of abuse in their children, who began acting strangely, using sexually provocative language and sexually inappropriate behavior.

Upon taking their children to the hospital, it was revealed that they also suffered an array of physical symptoms showing clear cases of sexual abuse. When authorities would not act, the parents directly contacted the parents of other kids at the center and the result was shocking: 60 children had clear physical signs of abuse and 4 had contracted Chlamydia. Some were only infants.

The American Journal of Orthopsychiatry wrote an extensive analysis of the victims of the Presidio. They stated:

“The severity of the trauma for children at the Presidio was immediately manifest in clear cut symptoms. Before the abuse was exposed, parents had already noticed the following changes in their children: vaginal discharge, genital soreness, rashes, fear of the dark, sleep disturbances, nightmares, sexually provocative language, and sexually inappropriate behavior. In addition, the children were exhibiting other radical changes in behavior, including temper outbursts, sudden mood shifts, and poor impulse control. All these behavioral symptoms are to be expected in preschool children who have been molested.”⁴⁶¹

The U.S. Army was in no hurry to investigate the claims of child abuse. It took them 12 days to form a strategy group, and nearly a month passed before they notified other parents of the day care that child abuse allegations had been made. Although it is normal procedure to shut down a government daycare after such allegations, the Presidio Daycare Center remained open for nearly a year. By then, 59 other victims between the ages of three and seven were identified.⁴⁶²

Reports of a satanic cult being housed within the military base had apparently surfaced many years earlier. Military Police had investigated some buildings after reports of a man dressed all in black holding a little girl’s hand had been reported. An MP was recorded as saying:

“We kicked the door open and here’s this nice little bedroom. In a corner was a mannequin with a gun aimed at the door. On the left side there was a bunk against the wall. There was a pentagram on the floor, a huge one. There were dolls’ heads all over the ceiling, just off-the-wall stuff… We were sitting there, we’ve got a cult on the Presidio of San Francisco and nobody cares about it. We were told by the provost marshal to just forget about it.”⁴⁶³

On the Autumnal equinox of 1987, an occult day of importance, fire would strike a building adjacent to the day care, destroying many records relating to the center. A month later, fire would destroy the day care center itself. The ATF found that the causes of both fires had been arson, contrary to the Armies own investigation which claimed faulty wiring.⁴⁶⁴

Only one man would ever have charges brought against him: Gary Hambright, a civilian employee who oversaw the daycare center. However, the prosecution bungled the case, bringing to trial only the children who ‘would make the best witnesses’ and leaving out the most prolific examples of physical abuse, such as those with rectal lesions and missing hymens. The judge presiding over the case deemed the charges as ‘too vague’ and Hambright walked free.

No other persons were charged and the US government quietly closed the case against Presidio itself.⁴⁶⁵ The lawyer for the Presidio was Joseph Russoniello, who also defended the United States government during the Iran/Contra trials.⁴⁶⁶

At one point in the investigation, it was revealed that another man was being investigated by the police: Lieutenant Colonel Michael Aquino, military intelligence specialist. Army documents and child testimony showed that children from the day care center regularly took trips outside of the center, and many children were able to accurately identify what the inside of Aquino’s house looked like. Investigators searched Aquino’s house and retrieved thousands of videos and photographs, and found what appeared to be a soundproof room, but charges were never brought against him.⁴⁶⁷

Who exactly is Michael Aquino? It turns out he is an important piece of the puzzle. Aquino is openly a Satanist, who founded his own church called the Temple of Set. He coauthored the highly controversial document “Mindwar” in 1980, which would define the strategy and importance of Psychological Operations, aka PSYOPS, for the Department of Defense from that point forward. In ‘Mindwar’, Aquino argues that the reason for the failure in Vietnam was not tactical, but rather the United States simply lost the war of information, being unable to turn the Vietnamese to their cause and unable to convince the domestic public of the importance of the war.⁴⁶⁸

Aquino proposes a new look at PSYOPS, claiming that it ought to be at the very forefront of the war effort, the very first and the most important technique employed as soon as conflict is deemed inevitable. No longer would ‘tactical propaganda’ such as leaflets and loudspeakers on the battlefield suffice, instead a vast array of propaganda and coercion techniques are needed. This goes beyond what we traditionally think of propaganda, such as planted news stories or front organizations that we saw in Operation Mockingbird. He also advocates ‘Mindwar’ on American citizens.

“MindWar must target all participants if it is to be effective. It must not only weaken the enemy; it must strengthen the United States.”

Immediately afterwards is a disturbing justification on the use of PSYOPS on Americans:

“Under existing United States law, PSYOP units may not target American citizens. That prohibition is based upon the presumption that “propaganda” is necessarily a lie or at least a misleading half-truth, and that the government has no right to lie to the people. The Propaganda Ministry of Goebbels must not be a part of the American way of life. Quite right, and so it must be axiomatic of MindWar that it always speaks the truth. Its power lies in its ability to focus recipients’ attention on the truth of the future as well as that of the present. MindWar thus involves the stated promise of the truth that the United States has resolved to make real if it is not already so.”

So there is virtually no law barring the use of ‘Mindwar’ on Americans, because if it is not yet the truth, the Department of Defense will make it the ‘truth’.

Perhaps most terrifying is Aquino’s insistence that:

“There are some purely natural conditions under which minds may become more or less receptive to ideas, and MindWar should take full advantage of such phenomena as atmospheric electromagnetic activity, air ionization, and extremely low frequency waves.”

Consider the magnitude of this statement, imagine the Department of Defense manipulating domestic and foreign persons with Extremely Low Frequency waves to alter their political and moral dispositions to align with the interests of the United States. It sheds light on a statement Aquino makes in the beginning of the document:

“Psychotronic research is in its infancy, but the U.S. Army already possesses an operational weapons systems designed to do what LTC Alexander would like ESP to do – except that this weapons system uses existing communications media. It seeks to map the minds of neutral and enemy individuals and then to change them in accordance with U.S. national interests. It does this on a wide scale, embracing military units, regions, nations, and blocs.”

Psychotronics, as defined by Aquino himself, is ‘intelligence and operational use of ESP’. In the simplest terms, the Department of Defense has the capability to map a persons brain waves, and then use techniques such as ELF (Extremely Low Frequency Waves) to alter that persons brainwaves to a pattern more conducive to United States interests. This is the technique that Aquino is advocating to be used on domestic citizens, in the most defining thesis in PSYOPs history. And remember this paper was published 34 years ago. Where is the technology today?

As an important side note, Franklin victim Paul Bonacci once identified Michael Aquino as an associate of Larry King.⁴⁶⁹ Rusty Nelson at one point identified Michael Aquino as the man to whom he had seen Larry King once turn over a suitcase full of cash and bonds.⁴⁷⁰ In addition, Michael Aquino has been implicated in various other daycare and military installation child abuse scandals. One important example is the abuse case at the Jubilation Day Care Center at Fort Bragg, where multiple children positively identified Aquino as an abuser out of a video lineup of men dressed exactly like him.⁴⁷¹

[Editor’s Note] Watch this revealing video of Michael Aquino wearing a Satanic outfit defending Satanism on the Geraldo show in 1988. Why is this man allowed to influence military policy?

459 New York Times, “Army Will Close Child-Care Center,” November 16, 1987

460 San Jose Mercury News, “Army of the Night,” July 24, 1988

461 American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, “PRESCHOOL CHILD SEX ABUSE: The Aftermath of the Presidio Case,” April 1992

462 San Jose Mercury News, “Army of the Night,” July 24, 1988

463 Ibid.

464 Ibid.

465 San Jose Mercury News, “Abuse Case at Presidio Quietly Closed by US,” April 19, 1988

466 New York Times, “Moonlighting,” September 27, 1998

467 San Jose Mercury News, “Army of the Night,” July 24, 1988

468 Lt. Col. Michael Aquino, “Mindwar,” (10 pages, PDF Warning)

469 Court Transcripts, “Paul Bonacci vs. Lawrence E. King”

470 Executive Intelligence Review, “Stunning breakthrough reached in Nebraska satanic pedophile case,” March 19, 1999 (PDF Warning)

471 David McGowan, “The Pedophocracy.”

* * * *

Satanism in Franklin, Nebraska

Two primary witnesses in the Franklin proceedings, Paul Bonacci and Loretta Smith, neither of whom knew each other, both told stories of being sexually abused at the hands of satanic cults operating in Nebraska. The Douglas County grand jury acknowledged that the allegations in the Franklin case “necessitated our studying satanic and pedophile activity in eastern Nebraska, particularly in the Omaha metropolitan area.”⁴⁷²

Loretta Smith’s testimony would be sealed by the Douglas County Grand Jury, but references in the Grand Jury Final Report shed some light on what she discussed:

“In 1988 an Omaha girl, who was an inpatient at Richard Young Hospital, described a number of gruesome cult activities which she claimed to have witnessed between the approximate ages of 9 and 12…. According to the girl, she became involved in a cult where older male members sexually molested her and killed infants and children to establish their dominance over other cult members.”

Both Smith and Paul Bonacci claimed to have seen Larry King present at some rituals. Paul Bonacci wrote in his written history that King picked him up after school one day:

“…and took me to the Triangle which is in a wooded area in Sarpy County. I witnessed a sacrifice of a human baby boy. Everyone was chanting and it was a yearly ritual around the time of Christ’s birth to pervert the blood of Christ. They used daggers and cut the boy and filled a cup with his blood and mixed urine in it and forced all of us to drink from the cup and chant ‘Satan is Lord Lucifer our King. Realm of darkness come now empower us your slaves.’ Then they all began to chant some weird sounds and I got scared and was threatened I’d become the next sacrifice if I told anyone about it.”

One of the names on the ‘suspicious death list’ surrounding the Franklin Scandal is Kathleen Sorenson, who took in the children who fled from the Webb family among many other abused children. Sorenson gave a stunning report to a Christian television channel which aired in Nebraska in 1989, based on her experiences with over 30 abused foster children who spent months or years in her home.

It provides an eye-opening introduction to a shocking phenomenon known as ritual abuse. The claims without further documentation certainly seem to be fantastical, so I urge the reader to suspend their disbelief until after the empirical evidence of extreme abuse has been fully discussed:

“We got involved and learned about this subject because we were foster parents and worked with a number of children. And several years back, several of the children began, after a period of time and building up trust, to talk about some very bizarre events that had happened in their past, and they were frightening and very confusing. I really didn’t know what to think. We went to the police, and we went to social services, and there was really nothing anyone could do. These children we worked with are now adopted in safe homes and probably would never have talked had they not felt able to trust the people they were living with. There are certain things that are in common in the childrens’ stories when we talk about devil worship…

There are things that come up in every single story, such as candles. They all talk about sex. Sex is without a doubt a part of every area of this – all sorts of perverted sex.That is what you will first hear, about the sex, about the incest, and it is so hard to believe. But once we get that, we have learned that we can go on and ask and find out… and it will involve pornography; that is always part of it. Part of the reason is that they can use that to threaten the children. “We have pictures. We will show the police if you talk.” It makes the children feel that they are in great danger, and they are all very frightened of the law.

They talk about the garish makeup that the people in the group wear. They talk about singing that they didn’t understand. Obviously that is chanting, and that has come up in every one of these stories, and none of them call it chanting. There will be dancing. Most often that will involve sexual acts. There will always be a leader and they will be very frightened of the leader.

These children, from a very young age, and I am talking about children who came out of birth homes, the family they were born to, worshiped the devil. …

Important Note: The remainder of this testimony is highly graphic and disturbing. Only if you feel you are ready for it, click here.

Kathleen Sorenson died in October 1989, shortly after this report was aired. On a long rural road returning to her home, a car heading in the opposite direction crossed lanes and caused a head-on collision. Both the young woman driver who hit her and her husband had police records for cruelty to animals.⁴⁷³

472 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup,” p. 201

473 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup,” p. 204 – 211

* * * *

Historical Precedent

The idea of active widespread satanic and other occult activity in the United States certainly seems ludicrous. But there is an historical precedent. Consider these two quotes from the works of Alestair Crowley, founder of the Church of Satan in the year 1900:

“Moreover, the beast 666 adviseth that all children shall be accustomed from infancy to witness every type of sexual act, and also the process of birth, lest falsehood fog, and mystery stupefy, their minds, whose error else might thwart and misdirect the growth of their subconscious system of soul-symbolism… There are cases when seduction or rape may be emancipation or initiation to another. Such acts can only be judged by their results.” – Crowley, The Law is for All⁴⁷⁴

“In any case it was the theory of ancient magicians, that any living being is the storehouse of energy varying in quantity according to the size and the health of the animal, and in quality according to its mental and moral character. At the death of this animal the energy is liberated suddenly. The animal should therefore be killed within the circle, or the triangle, as the case may be, so that its energy cannot escape. An animal should be selected whose nature accords with that of the ceremony… For the highest spiritual working one must accordingly choose the victim which contains the greatest and purest force. A male child of perfect innocence and high intelligence is the most satisfactory and suitable victim.” – Crowley, Magick in Theory and Practice⁴⁷⁵

474 Alestair Crowley, “The Law is for All,” Excerpt available here.

475 Alestair Crowley, “Magick in Theory and Practice,” Excerpt available here.

* * * *

Empirical Evidence

In 1996, three members of the American Psychological Association conducted a survey of the organization, receiving feedback from 2,709 clinical psychologists. 30% acknowledged seeing at least one case of “ritualistic or religion-related abuse since January 1, 1980”.⁴⁷⁶Two-thirds of these cases were described as ‘religion related’ and one-third were described as ‘ritual abuse’. Of those who acknowledged seeing these cases, 93% of the clinical psychologists said that they believed the abuse did indeed occur. The authors concluded that the psychologists, psychiatrists, and social workers who responded to their survey “overwhelmingly believed both the allegations of abuse and the allegations of ritual or religious elements of the abuse”.

Another study surveyed 810 members of the British Psychological Society who had patients who suffered from sexual abuse, and found that 15% had patients who reported satanic ritual abuse. Of these, 80% believed that their patient did indeed suffer from the reported abuse.⁴⁷⁷

One study examined 270 cases of substantiated sexual abuse involving day cares in England found that 13% of the cases included allegations of ritual abuse.⁴⁷⁸

One survey of the membership of the International Society for the Study of Multiple Personality and Dissociation concluded that 88% of 1185 respondents “reported belief in ritual abuse, involving mind control and programming”.⁴⁷⁹

“In 1992 alone, Childhelp USA logged 1,741 calls pertaining to ritual abuse, Monarch Resources of Los Angeles logged approximately 5,000, Real Active Survivors tallied nearly 3,600, Justus Unlimited of Colorado received almost 7,000, and Looking Up of Maine handled around 6,000. Even allowing for some of these calls to have been made by people who assist survivors but are not themselves survivors, and for some survivors to have called more that one helpline or made multiple calls to the same helpline, these numbers suggest that at a minimum there must be tens of thousands of survivors of ritual abuse in the United States.” – Catherine Gould, The Journal of Psychohistory⁴⁸⁰

In 2007, four researchers created an international online survey divided into three parts, available in English and German, called Extreme Abuse Surveys, in an effort to gather a large number of responses to gather preliminary data on the nature and prevalence of extreme abuse.⁴⁸¹ The researchers were Wanda Karricker, PhD and retired U.S. psychologist, Bettina Overcamp, PhD and active psychologist in Germany, Thorsten Becker, German social worker who won the “German Child Protection Award” in 1994 for his work with abused children, and Carol Rutz, a survivor of extreme abuse and mind control. The surveys show repeated allegations of abuse used for the purposes of mind control, which will be explored in the next chapter.

1,471 participants from 31 countries answered at least one question on the survey listed for ‘Adult Survivors’, and 451 people from 20 countries responded to at least one question listed for ‘Professionals’ who have worked with at least one adult survivor of extreme abuse. Of the adult survivors, 257 people from 15 countries responded that they had been victims of ‘Government Mind Control’ experimentation as a child, and 71 professionals from 6 countries responded that they had worked with at least 1 adult survivor of extreme abuse who reported to have been a victim of government mind control experimentation as a child. 166 survivors reported being experimented on by doctors who spoke German or with a heavy German accent.

Of the adult survivors, 236 reported to have been drugged against their will, 236 reported to have been sexually abused by multiple perpetrators, 228 reported being threatened with death if they ever discussed their experiences, 222 reported sensory deprivation experiments, 217 reported electroshock experiments, 197 witnessed murder by their perpetrators, 196 witnessed animal mutilations, 184 reported the use of feces in their abuse, 183 reported being used in child pornography, 178 reported starvation, 171 reported hypnosis, and 169 reported child prostitution.

Of the 257 EAS respondents who reported that secret mind control experiments were used on them as children, 69% (177) reported having been abused in a satanic cult. Of the 543 EAS respondents who reported that they had been abused in a satanic cult, 33% (179) reported having been used in secret mind control experiments as children.

159 survivors had heard Greek letters being used during their abuse, and 160 experienced sexual mind control programming used for blackmail or personal use. 228 survivors answered ‘yes’ to the question: “My perpetrator(s) deliberately created/programmed dissociative states of mind (such as alters, personalities, ego-states) in me.”

Research has consistently shown that false allegations of child sexual abuse by children are rare. One 1987 study examined 576 consecutive referrals of child sexual abuse to the Denver Department of Social Services, and categorized the reports as either reliable or fictitious. In only 8% of the total cases were children judged to have possibly advanced a fictitious allegation.⁴⁸²

In a more recent study, investigators reviewed case notes of all child sexual abuse reports to the Denver Department of Social Services over 12 months. Of the 551 cases reviewed, there were only 14 (2.5%) instances of erroneous concerns about abuse emanating from children. These consisted of three cases of allegations made in collusion with a parent, three cases where an innocent event was misinterpreted as sexual abuse and eight cases (1.5%) of false allegations of sexual abuse.⁴⁸³

Researchers into the phenomenon of Satanic Ritual Abuse have come to the conclusion that the phenomenon is widespread and transcends geographic boundaries.⁴⁸⁴

One such study, titled “Multiple Personality Disorder and Satanic Ritual Abuse: The Issue of Credibility” states:

“The comparability of both the child and adult accounts is said to transcend geographical and relationship boundaries, with descriptions emerging from both survivor groups revealing common themes, behaviors, symbols, and paraphernalia. Assuredly, the possibility of cross-contamination of accounts exists when, for example, a group of suspected or potential victims seems to be involved in a single day care case, or when adult contemporaries are aware of the details of others’ reports. However, one can not discount the similarity of accounts given spontaneously and independently by individuals who are unrelated personally, geographically, or through shared knowledge.”

The empirical evidence of ritual abuse for the purposes of mind control establishes that the phenomenon is widespread and international, and consistency between methods of abuse. Furthermore, the methods of abuse correlate both with known experimentation under MK-ULTRA and the testimonies of child abuse case studies such as Franklin and Presidio. It also reveals a solid consensus that psychiatrists who have been exposed to patients who have suffered from ritual abuse believe that the abuse did indeed occur. Its interesting to note that such a widespread consensus is relatively rare in the field of psychology, let alone for such a controversial topic.

476 Bottoms, Bette L.; Shaver, Phillip R.; Goodman, Gail S. “An analysis of ritualistic and religion-related child abuse allegations.” Law and Human Behavior, Vol 20(1), Feb 1996

477 Andrews, B., Morton, J., Bekerian, D.A., Brewin, C.R., Davies, G.M., & Mollon, P. “The recovery of memories in clinical practice: Experiences and beliefs of British Psychological Society practitioners.” The Psychologist, May, 1995

478 Finkelhor, D., Williams, L., & Burns, N. “Nursery crimes: Sexual abuse in day care.” Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. 1988

479 Perry, N.E. “Therapists’ experiences of the effects of working with dissociative patients.” Paper presented at the 9th Annual Meeting of the International Society for the Study of Multiple Personality and Dissociation, Chicago, IL. 1992

480 Catherine Gould “Denying Ritual Abuse in Children,” The Journal of Psychohistory Volume 22, 1995

481 Extreme Abuse Survey

482 Jones, D. P. H., and J. M. McGraw, “Reliable and Fictitious Accounts of Sexual Abuse to Children.” Journal of Interpersonal Violence, 2, 27-45, 1987

483 Oates, R. K., D.P. Jones, D. Denson, A. Sirotnak, N. Gary, and R.D. Krugman, “Erroneous Concerns about Child Sexual Abuse.” Child Abuse & Neglect 24:149-57, 2000

484 Van Benschoten, Susan C., “Multiple Personality Disorder and Satanic Ritual Abuse: The Issue of Credibility” (PDF Warning)

* * * *

The ‘False Memory’ Hoax

Once the evidence of extreme abuse began surfacing in surprising numbers, the ‘False Memory Syndrome Foundation’ (FMSF) was set up to promote the theory that victims are suffering from a syndrome that creates false memories, often at the suggestion of psychotic parents or over-zealous psychiatrists.

The members of the FMSF have been called as expert witnesses in hundreds of trials around the United States and have been routinely quoted as experts in the media. Their mission has been exceptionally successful, as the ‘false memory syndrome’ has become accepted as a fact in most of the public consciousness. Unfortunately, people rarely stop to ask the question, who exactly are the members of the FMSF, and how solid is their science?

Peter J. Freyd initiated the founding of the FMSF after being accused of sexual abuse by his daughter, Jennifer. His behavior has been particularly suspect, such as accusing his daughter of being brain damaged, despite the fact that she holds a PhD in Psychology, graduated magna cum laude from Penn and is currently a tenured professor of psychology at the University of Oregon. Speaking to The Oregonian, Jennifer Freyd stated that “I’m sometimes flabbergasted that my memory is considered ‘false’ and my alcoholic father’s memory is considered rational and sane.”⁴⁸⁵

Peter Freyd once stated that “With the help of Harold Lief and Marin Orne, the FMSF quickly gathered a respectable appearing advisory board, giving the new syndrome an aura of scientific acceptance.”⁴⁸⁶ Interestingly, Dr. Martin T. Orne has been heavily involved with MK-ULTRA experiments since the early ’60s, where he undertook hypnosis studies at Harvard Medical School with a $30,000 grant from the CIA.⁴⁸⁷

CIA documents have confirmed that Orne had a ‘top secret’ clearance in MK-ULTRA.⁴⁸⁸ He has published many papers relevant to the creation of a ‘Manchurian candidate’, including one called “Can a hypnotized subject be compelled to carry out otherwise unacceptable behavior?”, another called “The significance of unwitting cues for experimental outcomes: Toward a pragmatic approach”, and lastly “Restricted use of success cues in retrieval during post-hypnotic amnesia”.⁴⁸⁹This is an interesting subject matter history given the FMSF’s insistence that hypnotism is illegitimate.

Dr. Harold Lief was involved with brain electrode experiments at Tulane University, a notorious MK-ULTRA institution.⁴⁹⁰ Another prominent member, David Dinges, was a co-worker with Martin T. Orne and has been involved in research for Naval Intelligence, who oversaw the precursor mind control experiments to MK-ULTRA.⁴⁹¹

Founding member Ralph Underwager once proudly proclaimed to the pro-pedophilia publication Paidika:

“What I have been struck by as I have come to know more about and understand people who choose paedophilia is that they let themselves be too much defined by other people. That is usually an essentially negative definition. Paedophiles spend a lot of time and energy defending their choice. I don’t think that a paedophile needs to do that. Paedophiles can boldly and courageously affirm what they choose. They can say that what they want is to find the best way to love. I am also a theologian and as a theologian, I believe it is God’s will that there be closeness and intimacy, unity of the flesh, between people.

A paedophile can say: “This closeness is possible for me within the choices that I’ve made.” Paedophiles are too defensive. They go around saying, “You people out there are saying that what I choose is bad, that it’s no good. You’re putting me in prison, you’re doing all these terrible things to me. I have to define my love as being in some way or other illicit.” What I think is that paedophiles can make the assertion that the pursuit of intimacy and love is what they choose. With boldness, they can say, “I believe this is in fact part of God’s will.”⁴⁹²

Regarding the False Memory Syndrome Foundation, Columbia Journalism Review stated:

“Rarely has such a strange and little-understood organization had such a profound effect on media coverage of such a controversial matter. The [False Memory Syndrome] foundation is an aggressive, well-financed PR machine adept at manipulating the press, harassing its critics, and mobilizing a diverse army of psychiatrists, outspoken academics, expert defense witnesses, litigious lawyers, Freud bashers, critics of psychotherapy, and devastated parents.”⁴⁹³

The FMSF has repeatedly cited a study presented at a Harvard conference where researchers were repeatedly able to implant the false memory of mundane tasks like grocery shopping, into their subjects using techniques such as hypnosis.⁴⁹⁴ It has been championed as proof that memories are easily manipulated. However, research has shown that memories of abuse function very differently than average memories.

“However, leading memory researchers such as Dr. Bessel van der Kolk of Harvard Medical School maintain that traumatic memories, which typically are engraved in the sensorimotor processes, are not subject to the same kinds of contamination that can affect normal memory. Traumatic amnesia, described in the DSM-III-R as psychogenic amnesia, is a phenomenon which has been known to mental health professionals for more than 100 years. The clinically observed characteristics of traumatic memory formation and retrieval match precisely the patterns of memory recovery exhibited by SRA [Satanic Ritual Abuse] survivors, and strongly confirm the reality of their cult abuse.”⁴⁹⁵

There is also the case of Paul and Shirley Eberle, who are famous for propagating the idea of a ‘satanic panic’, that the widespread reporting of ritual abuse is merely a social contagion. They have published two books titled “The Politics of Child Abuse” and “The Abuse of Innocence” which promote this theory, and have been cited as experts in courts and the press. Ms. Magazine wrote a review of the interesting past of the Eberles, stating:

“What is startling about the Eberles’ reputation as ground-breaking experts in the field is that their dubious credentials have not been widely challenged. Paul and Shirley Eberle edit a soft-core magazine in California called the L.A. Star that contains a mixture of nude photos, celebrity gossip, telephone sex ads, and promos for The Politics of Child Abuse.

In the 1970’s, however, the Eberles were also publishing hard-core pornography. Their publication, Finger, depicted scenes of bondage, S & M, and sexual activities involving urination and defecation. A young girl portrayed with a wide smile on her face sits on top of a man whose penis is inside of her; a woman has oral sex with a young boy in a drawing entitled “Memories of My Boyhood.”

The Eberles were featured nude on one cover holding two life-size blow up dolls names “Love Girl” and “Play Guy.” No dates appear on the issues and the Eberles rarely attach their names, referring to themselves as “The L.A. Star Family.”

The Eberles were the distributors of Finger and several other underground magazines, says Donald Smith, a sergeant with the obscenity section of the Los Angeles Police Department’s vice division who followed the couple for years. LAPD was never able to prosecute for child pornography: “There were a lot of photos of people who looked like they were under age but we could never prove it.” The pictures of young children in Finger are illustrations, and child pornography laws were less rigid a decade ago than they are today.

“Sexpot at Five,” “My First Rape, She Was Only Thirteen,” and “What Happens When Niggers Adopt White Children” are some of the articles that appeared in Finger. One letter states: “I think it’s really great that your mags have the courage to print articles & pixs [sic] on child sex… Too bad I didn’t hear from more women who are into child sex… Since I’m single I’m not getting it on with my children, but I know of a few families that are. If I were married & my wife & kids approved–I’d be having sex with my daughters.”

Another entry reads: “I’m a pedophile & I think its [sic] great a man is having sex with his daughter!…Since I didn’t get Finger #3, I didn’t get to see the stories & pics of family sex. Would like to see pics of nude girls making it with their daddy, but realize its too risky to print.”⁴⁹⁶

It is truly fascinating how ‘compromised’ the leading debunkers of ritual abuse are.

485 Anne Cossins, “Recovered Memories of Sexual Abuse: Fact or Fantasy?,” Judicial Review, Vol 3, 1997

486 The Leadership Council, “Crisis or Creation?”

487 The Harvard Crimson, “Harvard And the CIA Continued,” February 11, 1978

488 Colin A. Ross, “The C.I.A. Doctors.” Excerpt available here.

489 Ibid, Ross.

490 Ibid, Ross. Excerpt Available Here.

491 David Dinges Biography at UPenn.edu

492 Interview excerpt available here.

493 Columbia Journalism Review, “U-Turn on Memory Lane,” August 1997

494 BBC, “Can We Implant a False Memory in You?”

495 McCulley, D. “Satanic ritual abuse: A question of memory.” Journal of Psychology and Theology Fall, 1994 22(3) p.167-172

496 Ms. Magazine, “Paul and Shirley Eberle: A Strange Pair of Experts,” December 1988

* * * *

Conclusion

Even in light of the evidence, the idea of an active network of abusive cults certainly sounds ludicrous. In the context of psychopathy, the potential is at least recognizable.

Cults serve as a network for psychopaths who enjoy sadistic sexual practices and the potential for concealing knowledge. The very concept of the occult is based is taking knowledge out of the circulation of the masses and reserving it for a select few. In other words, keeping knowledge for selfish usages and to use this knowledge to wield power over others.

Former members of the Church of Satan and other similar cults have testified that the basic goal of the ‘occult knowledge’ is to understand the human psyche, primary human motivations and how humanity functions. This knowledge is then used to exploit people. The worldview of these groups is extremely dark, and is based on controlling others, gaining knowledge to use as influence, and then partnering with like-minded individuals and groups to expand upon this knowledge and use it more effectively.

The next step into the rabbit hole is that these groups act as ‘psychopath filtration’ centers. They deliberately target psychopaths for initiation and then use their resources to put them into positions of power in a variety of fields such as politics, law, business, education, science and more. Franklin, Dutroux, Savile, the Presidio and the Finders are all examples of psychopathic networks that have infiltrated these institutions of power, and are each a small glimpse into the hierarchy of the Pathocracy.

The next chapter will explore the uses of extreme abuse for the purpose of mind control, and why so many men involved with MK-ULTRA would have a vested interest in marginalizing the existence of such abuse.

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. How connected are occult groups with each other?

2. Is the CIA responsible for various cults as ‘front groups’ for MK-ULTRA and other projects?

3. Why is the discussion of the existence of cults marginalized from the mainstream?

4. Why were the Finders interested in terrorism and explosives?

5. How widespread are networks that abuse and sell children?

6. What are the profits from child pornography and prostitution earned by cults such as the Finders used for?

7. How much influence has Michael Aquino’s ‘MindWar’ had on official Psychological Operation policy?

8. How much has technology discussed in ‘MindWar’ regarding the manipulation of the brain advanced in the more than 30 years of its publication?

9. Is it disturbing that Aquino’s Temple of Set, and likely by extension other occult groups, have knowledge and access to this technology?

10. Why were there child abuse cases at 30 separate military bases in a three-year period?

Note: Feeling overwhelmed with this material? Take an inspiration break in our Inspiration Center.

* * * *

Chapter XIV: Trauma-Based Mind Control

“’The end apparently justifies the means, is the approach we had taken,’ he said, ‘and so covert operations and assassinations, and maybe even the use of children in Monarch⁴⁹⁷ … seemed reasonable at the time, because we were saving the country. Everything for saving the country. National security and the Cold War. In war, all is fair.’” – CIA Director William Colby, as related by John DeCamp,Executive Intelligence Review, Volume 26, Number 12, March 19, 1999⁴⁹⁷

“He recalls one senior KGB man who told too many sexual jokes about young boys. ‘It didn’t take too long to recognize that he was more than a little fascinated by youths,’ says the source. ‘He was probably too good, too well-trained, to be either entrapped or to give away secrets. But he would have been tempted toward a compromising position by a preteen. I mentioned this, and they said, ‘As a psychological observer, you’re probably quite right. But what the hell are we going to do about it? Where are we going to get a twelve-year-old boy?’ The source believes that if the Russian had had a taste for older men, U.S. intelligence might have mounted an operation, ‘but the idea of a twelve-year-old boy was just more than anybody could stomach.'” – John Marks⁴⁹⁸

The idea of using a child for entrapment might have been too much for some CIA operatives to stomach, but what about to the psychopathic leadership?

Connecting the dots between the use of hypnosis, drugs and entrapment under MK-ULTRA, the abuse of children in Franklin, Belgium, Presidio and under the auspices of the Finders cult, and the extreme abuse perpetrated by occult groups against children, a dark picture begins to emerge. One link that ties together many of these cases is the creation of multiple personality disorder, now known as dissociative identity disorder, in the victims of extreme abuse.

Franklin’s Paul Bonacci alleged that his condition was created deliberately by scientists operating out of Offutt Air Force Base outside of Omaha, Nebraska, beginning at the age of three.⁴⁹⁹ Later, he was introduced to the pedophile and child abuse ring of Larry King, where he became a child prostitute to wealthy men and politicians around the country, as well as acting as a drug courier on many of his trips.

Dutroux’s first victim-witness, X1, alleged that her multiple personalities were induced when she was introduced to a group of violent pedophiles at the age of two by her grandmother.

Indeed, Multiple Personality Disorder is a big part of the picture. The current understanding of the disorder is that its onset begins at a very young age, after a child suffers from horrific abuse, often sexual in nature, that in a very real sense ‘shatters’ the child’s mind into a collection of coexisting personalities to deal with the abuse they have received.

“As many as 98% to 99% of individuals who develop dissociative disorders have recognized personal histories of recurring, overpowering, and often life-threatening disturbances at a sensitive developmental stage of childhood.” – WebMD⁵⁰⁰

The brain apparently dissociates exceptionally well: researchers have found that sufferers of Dissociative Identity Disorder will often have no memories of abuse they endured, and go as far as to vehemently deny their past experiences, despite extensive documentation by hospitals and courts of the abuse at the time it happened, and in addition, lifelong physicals scars and symptoms that had arisen from the abuse. However, when an ‘alter’ was present as the dominant psyche, detailed memories of the abuse were present.⁵⁰¹ The same study found that the ‘alters’ would have completely distinct personalities, with different handwriting, and often, different genders.

It is very likely that the possibility of deliberately creating multiple personalities in a child was understood at least as early as the medical experiments undertaken during World War II by the Third Reich. A cursory reading of the available data regarding the work of certain doctors such as the notorious ‘Angel of Death’ Dr. Mengele shows that much of the research undertaken at concentration camps had to do with inflicting trauma and recording its various effects. A logical conclusion is that these psychopathic doctors attempted to understand and then exploit the condition.

Remember G.H. Estabrooks, associate of the FBI and CIA, and World War II hypnotist who was discussed in the MKULTRA chapter? Here is a salient quote, taken from a 1968 article in theProvidence Evening Bulletin, which will set a stage for the introduction to the topic of Dissociative Identity Disorder and hypnotism:

“The key to creating an effective spy or assassin rests in splitting a mans personality, or creating multiple personalities, with the aid of hypnotism… this is not science fiction. This has and is being done. I have done it.”⁵⁰²

The CIA and Estabrooks conceded that only one in five people could be susceptible to hypnotism, and even less would be able to be subjected to the extreme dissociation and amnesia involved in the creation of multiple personalities. So research was conducted towards increasing the susceptibility of hypnotic mind control through the use of drugs and electroshock. The latter technique offers a glimpse of the tip of the iceberg into a variety of techniques involving using trauma to store memories in a sensitive part of the brain, with long-lasting recall potential but otherwise amnesiac effects in the primary personality.

The extension of this research is known as “trauma-based mind control.” The general idea is to subject children to horrific and unthinkable abuse at a sensitive age of development with the purpose of deliberately creating multiple personalities. The alternate personalities would then be programmed, through the use of hypnosis, drugs and further trauma, sometimes to store sensitive information, sometimes to create spies, assassins, prostitutes and more.

The victim’s primary personality would be completely unaware not only that they had programmed alternate personalities, but that they had been a victim of extreme abuse in the first place. Due to the associated trauma, the programming would be stored in a different part of the brain than normal memories, increasing both the power of the memory and the difficulty of recall.⁵⁰³ Using hypnotic suggestion, any designated person with the proper information, such as a code word, would be able to access a victims alternate personality and exploit the programming.

497 ‘Monarch’ is the alleged name for the program of Trauma-Based Mind Control, most frequently given by the victims of the program themselves, although the legitimacy of this moniker has not been confirmed. CIA director William Colby’s quote is from the Executive Intelligence Review, “Stunning breakthrough reached in Nebraska satanic pedophile case,” March 19, 1999 (PDF Warning). The quote is in the section titled “The last testament of William Colby.”

498 John Marks, “The Search for the Manchurian Candidate,” page 72, PDF available here

499 John DeCamp, “The Franklin Coverup”, page 366

500 WebMD, “Dissociative Identity Disorder (Multiple Personality Disorder)”

501 Lewis, Dorathoy Otnow et al. “Objective Documentation of Child Abuse and Dissociation in 12 Murderers With Dissociative Identity Disorder.” American Journal of Psychiatry

502 Ross, Colin, “The C.I.A. Doctors: Human Rights Violations by American Psychiatrists.”

503 McCulley, D. “Satanic ritual abuse: A question of memory.” Journal of Psychology and Theology Fall, 1994 22(3) p.167-172

* * * *

The ‘Greenbaum’ Speech: A Trauma-Based Mind Control Exposé

In 1992, a preeminent psychologist in the study of clinical hypnosis, Dr. Corydon Hammond, PhD, gave an astounding speech delivered at the Fourth Annual Eastern Regional Conference on Abuse and Multiple Personality Disorder, sponsored by the Center for Abuse Recovery & Empowerment, The Psychiatric Institute of Washington, D.C.. In this landmark speech titled “Hypnosis in MPD: Ritual Abuse, he explained his experiences with patients suffering from Dissociative Identity Disorder.”⁵⁰⁴

Before analyzing the speech, here are Dr. Corydon’s credentials:

• B.S., M.S., Ph.D. (Counseling Psychology) from the University of Utah.

• Licensed Psychologist, Licensed Marital Therapist, Licensed Family Therapist, State of Utah.

• Associate Professor of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, Utah School of Medicine.

• Adjunct Associate Professor of Educational Psychology, University of Utah.

• Director and Founder of the Sex and Marital Therapy Clinic, University of Utah.

• Editor, The American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis.

• Advising Editor and Founding Member, Editorial Board, The Ericksonian Monograph.

• Referee, The Journal of Abnormal Psychology.

• Clinical Supervisor and Board Examiner, American Board of Sexology.

• Diplomate in Marital and Sex Therapy, American Board of Family Psychology.

• Diplomate in Clinical Hypnosis, the American Board of Psychological Hypnosis.

• Diplomate in Sex Therapy, the American Board of Sexology.

• 1989 Presidential Award of Merit, American Society of Clinical Hypnosis.

• 1990 Urban Sector Award, American Society of Clinical Hypnosis.

• President, American Society of Clinical Hypnosis.⁵⁰⁵

Dr. Hammond had been examining patients with dissociative identity disorder (DID, formerly known as MPD) and came across some startling discoveries, which he verified with many of his peers. Many of them had undergone horrific ritual and sexual abuse as a child exactly as described in the case studies examined in previous chapters.

After a brief introduction, Dr. Hammond began with saying:

“In Chicago [in 1984], at the first international congress where ritual abuse was talked about, I can remember thinking, “How strange and interesting.” I can recall many people listening to an example given that somebody thought was so idiosyncratic and rare, and all the people coming up after saying, “Gee, you’re treating one, too? You’re in Seattle … Well, I’m in Toronto … Well, I’m in Florida … Well, I’m in Cincinnati.” I didn’t know what to think at that point.

It wasn’t too long after that I found my first ritual-abuse patient in somebody I was already treating and we hadn’t gotten that deep yet. Things in that case made me very curious about the use of mind control techniques and hypnosis and other brainwashing techniques…

The fascinating thing was that as I did a telephone consult with a therapist that I’d been consulting with for quite a number of months on an MPD case in another state, I told her to inquire about certain things. She said, “Well, what are those things?” I said, “I’m not going to tell you, because I don’t want there to be any possibility of contamination. Just come back to me and tell me what the patient says.” She called me back two hours later, and said, “I just had a double session with this patient and there was a part of him that said, ‘Oh, we’re so excited. If you know about this stuff, you know how the cult programmers get on the inside and our therapy is going to go so much faster.’

…I’ve consulted in eleven states and one foreign country, in some cases over the telephone, in some cases in person, in some cases giving the therapist information ahead of time and saying, “Be very careful how you phrase this. Phrase it in these ways so you don’t contaminate.” In other cases I didn’t give the therapist information ahead of time so they couldn’t contaminate the results.

When you start to find the same highly esoteric information in different states and different countries, from Florida to California, you start to get an idea that there’s something going on that is very large, very well coordinated, with a great deal of communication and systematicness to what’s happening.

So I have gone from someone kind of neutral and not knowing what to think about it all, to someone who clearly believes ritual abuse is real and that the people who say it isn’t are either naive like people who didn’t want to believe the Holocaust or—they’re dirty [involved in the programs]. ”

Immediately we get the understanding that these victims are not confined geographically, and in addition, an insight into how Dr. Hammond approached his investigation as to avoid ‘hypnotic suggestion’ and other techniques which the ‘False Memory Syndrome Foundation’ cites as the basis of all ritual abuse claims. The last line, stating that those who deny the existence of ritual abuse are either naive or dirty, was met with lots of applause from the audience.

“What they basically do is they will get a child and they will start this in basic forms, it appears, by about two and a half after the child’s already been made dissociative. They’ll make him dissociative not only through abuse, like sexual abuse, but also things like putting a mousetrap on their fingers and teaching the parents, “You do not go in until the child stops crying. Only then do you go in and remove it.” They start in rudimentary forms at about two and a half and kick into high gear, it appears, around six or six and a half, continue through adolescence with periodic reinforcements in adulthood.

Basically, in the programming the child will be put typically on a gurney. They will have an I.V. in one hand or arm. They’ll be strapped down, typically naked. There’ll be wires attached to their head to monitor electroencephalograph patterns. They will see a pulsing light, most often described as red, occasionally white or blue. They’ll be given, most commonly I believe, Demerol. Sometimes it’ll be other drugs as well, depending on the kind of programming. They have it, I think, down to a science where they’ve learned you give so much every twenty-five minutes until the programming is done.

They then will describe a pain on one ear, their right ear generally, where it appears a needle has been placed, and they will hear weird, disorienting sounds in that ear while they see photic stimulation to drive the brain into a brain wave pattern with a pulsing light at a certain frequency, not unlike the goggles that are now available through Sharper Image and some of those kinds of stores.

Then, after a suitable period when they’re in a certain brain wave state, they will begin programming oriented to self-destruction and debasement of the person. One patient about eight years old had gone through a great deal of early programming which took place on a military installation. That’s not uncommon. I’ve treated and been involved with cases who are part of this original mind control project, as well as having their programming on military installations in many cases. We find a lot of connections with the CIA. ”

The victim testimony of the use of drugs and other techniques is similar to the available evidence regarding MK-ULTRA experiments such as Dr. Ewen Cameron’s ‘psychic driving’ and the documented search for drugs which help induce hypnosis. The references to this type of mind control being undertaken at military bases certainly seems absurd, as does Paul Bonacci’s claim that he was victimized at Offutt Airforce Base. But remember the New York Times article cited earlier that referenced 30 different military institutions having sexual abuse scandals within a three year period, and the depths of horrors unleashed at West Point and Presidio?

Another important aspect that Dr. Hammond mentions is the creation of certain brain wave state before the programming begins. When a mind control subject would be put into a certain brain wave state and hypnosis, then their programming could only be activated under that brain wave state, a type of ‘state-dependent learning’. This increases the amnesiac effect of the abuse and programming from the primary personality of someone suffering from multiple personality disorder.

Dr. Hammond goes on to describe the details of what a ‘cult programming session’ would entail for one of his subjects:

“This particular child was in a a private cult school where several of these sessions occurred a week. She would be taken into a room to get all hooked up. When she was in the proper altered state, they no longer had to monitor with electroencephalographs. She also already had electrodes placed on her; one in the vagina, for example, four on the head. Sometimes they’ll be on other parts of the body. They would then begin and would say to her, “You are angry with someone in the group.” She’d say, “No, I’m not,” and they’d violently shock her. They would say the same thing until she complied and didn’t make any negative response.

Then they would continue. “When you are angry with someone in the group, you will hurt yourself. Do you understand?” She answered, “No,” and they shocked her. They repeated again, “Do you understand?” “Well, yes, but I don’t want to.” Shock her again until they get compliance.

Then they keep adding to it. “And you will hurt yourself by cutting yourself. Do you understand?” Maybe she’d say yes, but they might say, “We don’t believe you,” and shock her anyway. “Go back and go over it again.” They would continue in this sort of fashion. She said typically it seemed as though they’d go about thirty minutes, take a break for a smoke or something and come back. They might review what they’d done and then stop, or go on to new material. She said the sessions might go half an hour, or as much as three hours. She estimated three times a week.

Programming was done under the influence of drugs in a certain brainwave state, with these noises in one ear and the programmers speaking in the other ear, usually the left ear, which is associated with right hemisphere non-dominant brain functioning. All this while they were talking to her and therefore requiring her intense concentration, intense focusing. Often they would have to memorize and say certain things back, word perfect, to avoid punishment, shock, and other kinds of things that were occurring. This is basically how a lot of programming goes on.

Some of it will also use other typical brainwashing techniques. There will be very standardized types of hypnotic things done at times. There will be sensory deprivation which we know increases suggestibility in anyone. According to the research, suggestibility is significantly increased with total sensory deprivation. It’s not uncommon before they do certain of these things for them to use this a great deal, including formal sensory-deprivation chambers.”

The idea of ‘cult schools’ certainly recalls the ‘Finders’ case study discussed earlier. It is possible that the series of revelations and inquiries such as the Joint Hearing of the Select Intelligence Committee during the 1970’s prompted the CIA to discontinue their official relationship with these projects and instead contract them out to cults such as the Finders and Michael Aquino’s Temple of Set. Remember that official documents discussed in the MK-ULTRA chapter mentioned 6% of projects being too sensitive for any connections to the agency.

In addition to the lack of official connection to the CIA, which diminishes liability and culpability, there is a bonus effect: Plausible deniability. When these projects are uncovered, people are simply be disbelief that such atrocious acts could have occurred, let alone connected to the United States government.

Dr. Hammond goes on to describe the different brainwave states during which programming took place, which were consistent throughout all of his patients and those of his peers: Alpha, Beta, Gamma, Delta, Theta, Gamma and Omega – a phenomenon noted by over 100 of the respondents to the Extreme Abuse Surveys. Each brainwave state was associated with a specific type of programming and seemed to be present in a specific ‘alter’, which was also mostly consistent among the patients.

“Alphas appear to represent general programming, the first kind of things put in. Betas appear to be sexual programs. For example, how to perform oral sex in a certain way, how to perform sex in rituals, having to do with producing child pornography, directing child pornography, or prostitution. Deltas are killers trained in how to kill in ceremonies. There’ll also be some self-harm stuff mixed in with that, assassination and killing.

Then there’s Omega. I usually don’t include that word when I say my first question about this or any part inside that knows about Alpha, Beta, Delta, Theta, because Omega will shake them even more. Omega has to do with self-destruct programming. Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end. This can include self-mutilation as well as killing-themselves programming. Gamma appears to be system protection and deception programming which will provide misinformation to you, try to misdirect you, tell you half-truths, protect different things inside. There can also be other Greek letters.

I’d recommend that you go and get your entire Greek alphabet, and if you have verified that some of this stuff is present and they have given you some of the right answers about what some of this material is, and I can’t underline enough: DO NOT LEAD THEM. Do not say, “Is this killers?” Get the answer from them, please. When you’ve done this and it appears to be present, I would take your entire Greek alphabet, and with ideomotor signals, go through the alphabet and say, “Is there any programming inside associated with Epsilon, Omicron,” and go on through.

There may be a system to some of the other letters, but I’m not aware of it. I found, for example in one case, that Zeta had to do with the production of snuff films that this patient was involved with. With another person, Omicron had to do with their linkage and associations with drug smuggling and with the Mafia, big business, and government leaders. So there’s going to be some individualism, I think, in some of those. Some are come-home programs, “come back to the cult” programs. ”

One gets the impression that there is a very large, tightly connected network working through numerous organizations and institutions to undertake these experiments. At one point, Dr. Hammond notes that while the programming seems to be widely systematic among victims with no personal or geographic relations, there is one factor that is always different: Erasure codes to remove certain aspects of programming.

“Here’s the flaw in the system. They have built in shut-down and erasure codes, so if they got into trouble they could shut something down and they could also erase something. These codes will sometimes be idiosyncratic phrases, or ditties. Sometimes they will be numbers maybe followed by a word. There’s some real individuality to that. At first I had hoped if we can get some of these, maybe they’ll work with different people. No such luck. It’s very unlikely, unless they were programmed at about the same point in time as part of the same little group.

Stuff that I’ve seen suggests that the programmers carry laptop computers which still include everything that they did twenty, thirty years ago in terms of the names of alters, the programs, the codes, and so on.

I remember a woman about twenty-four years old who came in and claimed her father was a Satanist. Her parents divorced when she was six. After that, her father had visitation, and he would take her to rituals sometimes up until age fifteen. She said, “I haven’t gone to anything since I was fifteen.” Her therapist believed this at face value. We sat in my office. We did a two-hour inquiry using hypnosis. We found the programming present. In addition to that we found that every therapy session was debriefed, and in fact they had told her to get sick and not come to the appointment with me. Another one had been told that I was Cult and that if she came I would know that she’d been told not to come and I would punish her.

If anything meaningful comes out in a patient who’s being monitored like that, my belief is you can’t do meaningful therapy other than being supportive and caring and letting them know you care a lot, and you’ll be there to support them. But I wouldn’t try to work with any kind of deep material or deprogramming with those being monitored, because I think it can do nothing but get them tortured and hurt unless they can get into a safe, secure inpatient unit for an extended period of time to do some of the work required. From what I’ve learned thus far, they’re tortured with electric shocks.

I have a feeling that when you make inquiries you’re going to find that probably greater than fifty percent of these patients, if they’re bloodline, meaning mother or dad or both involved, will be monitored on some ongoing basis.”

Much of the rest of the speech deals with techniques for the therapists attending the conference to approach treatment of patients who have dissociative identity disorder and were victims of satanic ritual abuse. But Dr. Hammond doesn’t hesitate to come to conclusions about the purpose of the programming or the perpetrators:

“The way you create Manchurian Candidates is you divide the mind. It’s part of what the intelligence community wanted. If you’re going to get an assassin, you divide the mind. Cases like the assassination of Robert Kennedy fascinate me. Bernard Diamond, on examining Sirhan Sirhan, found that he had total amnesia of the killing of Robert Kennedy. Yet under hypnosis he could remember it. But after he was out of hypnosis, he could not remember a thing, despite suggestions he would be able to consciously remember.

The interesting thing is how many people have described the same scenario, and how many people that we have worked with who have had relatives in NASA, in the CIA, and in the Military, including very high-ups in the Military.

People ask, “What’s the purpose of it?” My best guess is that they want an army of Manchurian Candidates, tens of thousands of mental robots who will do prostitution, child pornography, smuggle drugs, engage in international arms smuggling, do snuff films, and all sorts of other very lucrative things. These Manchurian Candidates will do the bidding of their masters, so that eventually the megalomaniacs at the top believe they can create a Satanic Order that will rule the world.”

The end of Dr. Corydon’s speech was met with long, sustained applause by the attendees of the conference who recognized the bravery of going public with this information, particularly as many had their long-held suspicions regarding the nature of mind control in their patients confirmed.

[Editor’s Note] In his speech, Dr. Corydon also commented on being the first to speak publicly about this disturbing information and added, “I and a few others that I’d shared it with were hedging out of concern because of personal threats and death threats. I finally decided to hell with them. If they’re going to kill me, they’re going to kill me. It’s time to share more information with therapists.” Yet due to intense threats, Dr. Hammond stopped speaking about this topic shortly after this speech and has remained quiet since. The manager of WantToKnow.info, Fred Burks, reached Dr. Corydon by phone. He refused to talk about or even acknowledge the speech. A PEERS board member present at the speech says there is no doubt he was silenced.

504 Full text of the speech available here. Although I directly quote about half of the speech, the parts I believe are most relevant and illuminating, it is worth reading in its entirety, multiple times.

505 University of Utah Health Care, profile of Dr. Corydon Hammond, Phd.

* * * *

Victims Speak

Bill Clinton’s administration hosted the Presidential Advisory Committee on Radiation Experiments on March 15, 1995, and two victims of trauma-based mind control along with their therapist gave a stunning presentation of their abuse at the hands of MK- ULTRA. The case of victim Claudia Mullen is particularly interesting. Claudia had been referred to Psychiatrist Valerie Wolf after experiencing a sexual assault, and was unresponsive in therapy for many months. Unlike many other therapists, Wolf did not use hypnosis or any other memory retrieval techniques with Mullen.

“It needs to be made clear that these clients have remembered these names and events spontaneously, with free recall and without the use of any memory retrieval technique such as hypnosis. As much as possible, we have tried to verify the memories. I have sent information from one of my clients to Alan Scheflin, Professor of Law at Santa Clara University Law School (and a judicially recognized expert on mind and behavior control). He has been able to confirm that the information that she has supplied is absolutely true, and that her memories could not have been derived from any published source.” – Valerie Wolf, speaking to the Presidential Advisory Commission on Radiation.⁵⁰⁶

Here are some excerpts from Claudia Mullen’s testimony, from which she has earned no money and named men who were still alive:

“Good afternoon. Between the years 1957 and 1984 I became a pawn in the government’s game. Its ultimate goal was mind control and to create the perfect spy, all through the use of chemicals, radiation, drugs, hypnosis, electric shock, isolation in tubs of water, sleep deprivation, brainwashing, verbal, physical, emotional and sexual abuse. I was exploited unwittingly for nearly three decades of my life and the only explanations given to me were “that the end justifies the means” and “I was serving my country in their bold effort to fight communism”.

I can only summarize my circumstances by saying they took an already abused seven year old child and compounded my suffering beyond belief. The saddest part is, I know for a fact I was not alone. There were countless other children in my same situationand there was no one to help us until now…

In 1958 they told me I was to be tested by some important doctors from the Society, or the Human Ecology Society, and I was instructed to cooperate. I was told not to look at anyone’s faces, and to try hard to ignore any names because this was a very secret project. I was told all these things to help me forget. Naturally, as most children do, I did the opposite and remembered as much as I could. A Dr. John Gittinger tested me, Dr. Cameron gave me the shock, and Dr. Greene the x-rays.

Then I was told by Sid Gottlieb that “I was ripe for the big A” meaning ARTICHOKE. By the time I left to go home, just like every time from then on, I would remember only whatever explanations Dr. Robert G. Heath, of Tulane Medical University, gave me for the odd bruises, needle marks, burns on my head, fingers, and even the genital soreness. I had no reason to think otherwise. They had already begun to control my mind.

The next year I was sent to a lodge in Maryland called Deep Creek Cabins to learn how to sexually please men. I was taught how to coerce them into talking about themselves. I was used to entrap many unwitting men including themselves, all with the use of a hidden camera. I was only nine years old when the sexual humiliation began.

Another time I heard Dr. Martin Orne, who was the director then of the Scientific Office and later head of the Institute for Experimental Research state that “in order to keep more funding coming from different sources for radiation and mind control projects”, he suggested stepping up the amounts of stressors used and also the blackmail portions of the experiments. He said, “it needed to be done faster then to get rid of the subjects or they were asking for us to come back later and haunt them with our remembrances.

I would love nothing more than to say that I dreamed this all up and need to just forget it. But that would be a tragic mistake. It would also be lie. All these atrocities did occur to me and to countless other children, and all under the guise of defending our country. It is because of the cumulative effects of exposure to radiation, chemicals, drugs, pain, subsequent mental and physical distress that I have been robbed of the ability to work and even to bear children of my own.

It is blatantly obvious that none of this was needed, nor should ever have been allowed to take place at all, and the only means we have to seek out the awful truth and bring it to light is by opening whatever files remain on all the projects, and through another Presidential Commission on Mind Control.”

In follow-up interviews, Mullen went into more details regarding the entrapment operations she was a part of.

“The CIA kept hotel rooms in two of the best hotels in New Orleans, and year around they kept a suite. It was unique in that it had two bathrooms, and one bathroom was where they kept the hidden cameras. I was actually shown the hidden cameras by three men who handled that part of it. They called him Captain George White. He was formerly a doctor. He used to be in the narcotics squad in California, and then he became a doctor and joined the CIA.

And then there were two other men who worked with him. They would put me with the subjects who would be filmed (the men) and then when the men would come into town — I am talking about local politicians, government officials — anybody who they needed to possibly get something on, keep on file for future reference — should they need to coerce this person into supporting the projects. Senators, congressmen, anything like that — if they were in town, they were given this room.

They had no reason to think there was anything strange about the room. It didn’t look any different than any other room. It was just one of the better suites in the two hotels. I was shown how the cameras were set up behind mirrors — behind the mirrors which are in every hotel room, behind the dresser. They would sit there and they would film it.

When I was first told this I … was nine, and I went to the Deep Creek Cabins in Maryland. That’s when I was taught I was going to be part of this project, I had been accepted into this project, that I had been accepted into this project that would help the government stop Communism. ”⁵⁰⁷

At another point, she stated that one man she was involved with as an entrapment operation was Frank Church.

“I think they were afraid they would talk about the projects, and so they had to use something to keep them quiet. For instance, there was a guy named Church – all I knew was, he would try, he was very important to them because he was going to convince other people to let the projects keep going and so they had to get something on this guy, Church. This was later, when I was in high school. Supposedly he ended up talking other people into letting the projects keep going. He was supposed to be investigating – to see if there was anything wrong being done by the CIA – and so he of course decided nothing wrong was being done because they had a film on him.”⁵⁰⁸

Senator Frank Church headed the United States Senate Select Committee to Study Governmental Operations with Respect to Intelligence Activities, popularly known as the ‘Church Committee’.⁵⁰⁹ The committee was the first to investigate the CIA for their illegal actions under MK-ULTRA, Project Mockingbird and other enterprises. The alleged entrapment of Frank Church may explain how the CIA was able to escape any sort of reform from Congress and continued many illicit projects, albeit with more secrecy. It is the perfect example of how important entrapment was to the agency and how effective it could be to their uninterrupted continuation.

There is certainly the potential that Mullen’s testimony is a lie. After all, many of the names she alleged to have been a part of her mind control program had been publicly named as a part of the MK-ULTRA program. At least one had not: Darwin Fenner, a ‘high- society’ socialite and MK-ULTRA institution Tulane administrator.⁵¹⁰ Mullen has not seemed to make any money from her allegations, against many men who were still alive, given to a Presidential investigative committee. In addition, her testimony was reviewed by Alan Scheflin, Professor of Law at Santa Clara University Law School and judicially recognized expert in mind and behavior control, who stated that her claims could not have been derived from any known publication, making her testimony worth discussing.

One particularly disturbing sentence from Mullen’s testimony is: “[Dr. Martin T. Orne] said, ‘it needed to be done faster then to get rid of the subjects or they were asking for us to come back later and haunt them with our remembrances.’” The idea that trauma-based mind control victims would be ‘disposed of’ once they outlived their usefulness is truly terrifying, but certainly in the mind of a psychopath it would be a logical and necessary step to take. Perhaps it explains why only a handful of victims have been able to recover from their abuse and synthesize their memories coherently enough to present their case of being abused.

506 The Testimony of Valerie B. Wolf

507 Interview available here.

508 Interview available here.

509 Wikipedia article on the Church Committee.

510 Tulanelink.com

* * * *

Conclusion

All in all, trauma-based mind control has become a widespread program expanded from the original MK-ULTRA research. Extreme abuse at a young age has been revealed to be the most effective way of controlling the mind. Psychopathic networks in both occult groups and clandestine agencies jumped at the opportunity to create a veritable army of mind controlled slaves using the most depraved and violent techniques at their disposal.

By using torture such as electric shock and sexual abuse, these psychopaths have found a way to literally create blank slate alternate personalities which can be programmed for all sorts of illicit activities. Child prostitution, pornography, snuff films, assassinations and drug running are all direct applications of mind control programming. Another likelihood is programming among elite military units to undertake activities that would otherwise be balked at, such as death squads and terrorism.

The documented MK-ULTRA interest in electric shock, hypnosis and sensory deprivation are collectively the forerunners to trauma-based mind control, with the only missing documented ingredient being sexual abuse. It is certainly horrifying to consider that groups, government or otherwise, would deliberately subject children to such abuse but in the context of psychopathy, where psychopaths are sexual deviants and sadists, it is actually quite logical.

It is unclear how much of an overlap there is between the CIA and occult groups. The most likely scenario is that occult groups infiltrated the MK-ULTRA program and began using the knowledge they learned for their own subversive plans. It is also possible that the leading researchers into MK-ULTRA were simultaneously members of occult groups themselves.

The crossover between occult groups and military occupations, such as the Presidio, Michael Aquino and Dr. Corydon’s statement that “The interesting thing is how many people have described the same scenario, and how many people that we have worked with who have had relatives in NASA, in the CIA, and in the military, including very high-ups in the military,” certainly demands further investigation.

Many of the victims discussed by Dr. Hammond and those who responded to the Extreme Abuse Surveys claimed to have been born into a ‘direct bloodline’, meaning that their families have been practicing in a satanic cult for as many as 12 generations. These children have been essentially born for the purpose of being abused and exploited by cults.

Some have referred to themselves as the ‘chosen generation’, perhaps indicating that they have a role to play in the ‘end game’ of the Pathocracy. Children outside of these bloodlines seem to be more expendable, and are likely killed once they enter adulthood, when they are no longer useful for child prostitution or pornography, and their programming begins to weaken. We can only speculate about the death toll.

The two main groups involved in extreme abuse, the occult and clandestine intelligence agencies, seem to have distinct goals with significant overlap. The occult groups believe, in the vein of the writings of Alestair Crowley, that there are legitimate spiritual reasons for abuse and always perform their mind control operations during rituals. The CIA, on the other hand, seems more interested in espionage and entrapment. The overlap between the two is the goal of making money, and possibly the causing of violence and terror as part of a ‘strategy of tension’ campaign designed to steer the populace towards certain political goals and psychological states of terror, making manipulation of the populace easier.

Some researchers have suggested that trauma-based mind control dates as far back as the ancient Egyptian Mystery Schools, with the Book of the Dead serving as a blueprint to torture and utilize drugs to exert control over that person, raising the possibility that occult groups have been practicing a form of mind control for millennia and used the laboratory settings of the Nazis and the CIA to enhance and refine their techniques.⁵¹¹

I want to state emphatically that the entirety of the evidence does not necessarily point to a world with comprehensive and full subversion by satanic cults. These cults comprise only a portion of the occult groups operating within the Pathocracy and instead seem to be one arm of the psychopathic network, being concealed and protected for the use and creation of mind controlled slaves, profits from drug and child trafficking, and entrapment of pedophiles in government, military, finance and beyond.

Ultimately, the full motivations of trauma-based mind control, the breadth of the operations and number of victims cannot fully be known until the pathocracy which is responsible for these crimes against humanity is brought down and dissected. There is no knowledge more important towards this end than the extent of pedophilia and child abuse at the hands of the government and elite.

The disbelief of trauma-based mind control is understandable, so we must collectively work together to bring further evidence to light. After all, before the liberation of Auschwitz, the general sentiment was that such atrocities were impossible and reports of mass murder were greatly exaggerated. Unfortunately, they did happen, and serve as a reminder that crimes against humanity at the hands of psychopaths are very real.

As the final word on trauma-based mind control, I would like to reiterate the conclusion of Dr. Corydon Hammond:

People ask, “What’s the purpose of it?” My best guess is that they want an army of Manchurian Candidates, tens of thousands of mental robots who will do prostitution, child pornography, smuggle drugs, engage in international arms smuggling, do snuff films, and all sorts of other very lucrative things. These Manchurian Candidates will do the bidding of their masters, so that eventually the megalomaniacs at the top believe they can create a Satanic Order that will rule the world.”

511 Ron Patton, “Project Monarch, Nazi Mind Control.”

* * * *

Food for Thought:

1. Are ‘Manchurian candidates’ responsible for many of the assassinations and terrorist attacks in world history?

2. What are the limits of the possibility of controlling a society using mind control?

3. How many victims of Monarch are currently programmed today?

4. How many deaths have occurred due to the Monarch Program?

5. Why are members of the military-industrial complex so interested in marginalizing the existence of extreme abuse?

6. Just how dark does the crimes against humanity perpetrated by networks of psychopaths get?

* * * *

Chapter XV: The Pathocracy

On August 12, 1991, Investigative Journalist Danny Casolero was found dead in a bathtub at a hotel in West Virginia. He was in the state to meet a source on a story he was working on called “The Octopus”, which referred to a sprawling international criminal cabal that was exerting influence over a multitude of world events, such as the Iran hostage crisis that helped get Ronald Reagan elected. Although his death was ruled a suicide, the Casolero family was adamant it was a murder, citing threats on Danny’s life.⁵¹²

“The Octopus” that Danny Casolero was following is the Pathocracy. It has grown over the centuries, spreading its many tentacles across the globe, tightening it’s grip on control of information, money, wars and beyond. The scope of this book was mostly kept within the context of the United States but the scope of the “Octopus” is truly international. Of course, we cannot fully know the extent of the beast until it is starved and dissected. But until then, we can still reasonable construct the ‘big picture’ of our current situation.

The history recounted thus far is the history of institutions that have become saturated with psychopaths, who began to act ruthlessly on their desires to control and manipulate others. The process is called Ponerology, a term coined by Polish psychologist Andrjez Lobaczewski, who studied how the governments of the Soviet bloc became increasingly evil. The term comes from the Greek word poneria, meaning lawlessness. Lobaczewski published his work in a book titledPolitical Ponerology.⁵¹³

Lobaczewski had tremendous difficulty in publishing his book; At one point the manuscript was thrown in the furnace shortly before a raid by the secret police, and later the publication was blocked by none other than Zbigniew Brzezinski himself. He had hopes that by sending his manuscript to the Vatican, the word about Pathocracy would be heard on a global level. The manuscript was never returned. When he came to the United States, he figured that the freer society would be more accepting of his thesis; again, publication was blocked and his work was marginalized.

What was so revolutionary about Lobaczewski’s work that it was repressed by the elite worldwide? It is impossible to come to any conclusion from his work except that the development of Pathocracy is inevitable as long as the general population is ignorant about the psychopathic other. Psychopaths have always existed, and they view the world of normal people, those with morality and conscience, as something to be looked down upon and exploited. Perhaps the most shocking revelation of his work is that psychopaths learn to recognize each other, even at a young age.⁵¹⁴

The natural result is a network of psychopaths, a subset of the population that recognize their differences and feel not only contempt for the rest of society, but the need to control and manipulate them as well. Over time they become experts in our weaknesses and follies, watching from a distance with curiosity and amusement.

The idea that Psychopaths can recognize each other is central to the Pathocracy. Imagine for millennia the process of evolution of a psychopathic cabal growing in power and numbers, increasingly manipulating society. You would think that the United States would think twice when in 2004 we had one presidential candidate who was a member of a powerful secretive society known as the Skull and Bones run against the Presidential incumbent who was also a member of the same secretive society.⁵¹⁵

Tim Russert: You’re both were members of Skull and Bones, a secret society of Yale. What does that tell us?

Sen. John Kerry: Not much because it’s a secret.⁵¹⁶

These connections are not insignificant, rather they are the tip of the iceberg of a vast covert network of collusion, the result of the process of the ponerization.

This process of ponerization has happened to the major centers of covert power in our world. The CIA, FBI, NSA and the global financial elite all the way down to local police departments have all become ponerized institutions. Understanding the condition and development of ponerized networks is not just important, it is perhaps the most important information that society can have. It is the next step in evolution of society, the next grand paradigm shift.

This is the context under which the Pathocracy operates. A system of government hidden from the public view and operated by a psychologically distinct subset of the population whom do not feel empathy, have no conscience, and derive pleasure from the manipulation and abuse of the mass of the population they view as inferior. When we read accounts of horrific extreme abuse perpetrated against children, understand that the psychopathic otherenjoys this abuse. They derive pleasure from torture and murder.

These psychopaths recognize each other and over time they come to be key holders of power wherever it exists in an unadulterated form. Seemingly antagonistic institutions such as competing banks are actually operated by the same psychopathic cabal behind the scenes. In the same way that you and I naturally exclude social deviants from our social groups, psychopaths do with normal people. The result is a web of mutual conditioning of evil. Through a vast propaganda matrix, the Pathocracy is slowly conditioning humanity to conform to their sick standards such as endless war, resulting in a large portion of the population displaying ‘secondary psychopathic’ tendencies. This is the group that has subverted democracy not only in the United States but around the world, and are currently manipulating world events behind the scenes.

512 Washington Post, “Area Writer Investigating Inslaw Case Found Dead,” August 13, 1991.

513 The book Political Ponerology, though dense and sometimes difficult to navigate, is one of the most important pieces of literature ever written. A PDF of the full book (240 pages) is available here. A PDF of just the foreword, introduction, and afterword (36 pages) is available here. I recommend that everyone read at least this latter, short version.

514 Political Ponerology, page 127

515 The Telegraph, “The secret society that ties Bush and Kerry,” February 1, 2004

516 Campbell Brown, on CNN, transcript available here.

* * * *

Terrorism Today

At the outset of Operation Cyclone in the late ’70s, the CIA, acting as an arm of the Western financial elite, began fostering close relationships with a variety of powerful and important figures in the Middle East. The goal was a profoundly different landscape in the region, one where governments could do little to prevent the manipulation and control of indigenous resources and ideas.

One of these men was Osama bin Laden, a wealthy Saudi businessman, who would maintain a relationship with the CIA for an extended period of time, coordinating Islamic radicals to promote the goals of the CIA through terrorism and indoctrination, and further acting as a scapegoat to cast out to the public as an enemy that, for some reason, evaded capture for decades.

Bin Laden was not alone, but his organization, Al-Qaeda, would become the centerpiece of a contrived conflict known today as ‘The War on Terror’, which would eventually create trillions of profits for the very people tasked with ending it.

The United States made strong alliances with the very countries and people responsible for the funding and proliferation of terrorists such as Bin Laden, Saudi Arabia and Pakistan. The intelligence agencies of these countries are entirely corrupt, and have grown massively in power, to the point where they exert more control than the nominal governments of these states, becoming the ‘Deep State’, where the true power of a country resides in its covert operations and with people who’s names are generally not known to the public. Each of these countries, including the United States, act as an arm of the Pathocracy, and are responsible for a vast majority of the terrorism in the world today.

To some extent they literally operate organizations such as the Taliban and Al-Qaeda. This relationship becomes crystal clear when we see that the objectives of Al-Qaeda are perfectly in line with those of the Pathocracy. In Middle East conflicts such as the Libyan ‘Revolution’, struggles in Kosovo and Serbia, the Syrian ‘Civil War’, we see Al-Qaeda and the United States fighting on the same side.

The lack of any tangible results from the War on Terror is a ‘smoking gun’ for it’s uselessness. Terrorism today benefits the Pathocracy and those who serve it. The alleged true perpetrators of terrorism have their homelands bombed and ravished while it provides an excuse for continuous militarization and increasingly repressive domestic policies that do more to stifle legitimate domestic dissent than to curb foreign violence. Terrorism in countries such as Afghanistan and Iraq provide a convenient reason for increasing military presence, and to make the local governments dependent on the United States for protection.

The resulting destabilization makes the economies and resources easier to exploit. It is not a coincidence that terrorism and destabilization seem to precede important geopolitical objectives in that region. Domestic terrorism serves to keep the populace in fear and justify increased infringement of civil rights. Tragic events such as school shootings are nearly universally followed by a push for an agenda that furthers the goal of the Pathocracy.

That the last known meeting of Operation Gladio coordinators was in 1990 ought to have been, and still should be, front page news. A variety of the actors involved with Gladio are still in significant positions of power today.

Gladio has evolved from a localized European campaign of terrorism into a global network. Former FBI agent turned whistleblower Sibel Edmonds refers to it as ‘Gladio B’. The ‘Strategy of Tension’ has proved to be one of the most useful tools of the Pathocracy. Across the world, they have assassinated leaders, terrorized populations, destroyed infrastructure and spread destructive propaganda, and it has worked.

Where would Latin America be today had they not been terrorized by the Pathocracy? Decades of progress have been lost to repressive dictatorships propped up by the CIA spreading corruption and keeping the means of economic production in the hands of foreign powers.

And what about the Middle East? The landscape would be radically different without decades of interference. Minor differences between Islamic sects have been exploited to divide communities and nations. If even only a portion of the countries in this region united economically, the house of cards of the Pathocracy would tumble down.

They know this, and it is why the Middle East is such a hotbed of violence and destabilization today.

* * * *

The Agenda

The Pathocracy has been firmly in control of the United States democratic process for decades. As it stands, there are few significant differences between the two parties. To hide this fact, a variety of actors routinely circuit the mainstream media spitting vehemence towards their political ‘rivals’ while behind the scenes they joke about the smoke screen they have created.

The ‘Agenda’ that has evolved over the past decades is one of global hegemony, economic and military. Once distinct ideologies of liberalism and conservatism have evolved into neo-liberalism and neo-conservatism, who share the same goals and differ only slightly in means of implementing them.

The ‘Agenda’ is the agenda of the financial elite, using a manipulated democratic process, the United States military, and covert institutions as tools of maintaining their socially dominant position. When a foreign country threatens to upset the status quo, there is a regime change in nearly every single instance. In the few countries where this hasn’t been accomplished, it is very likely that a regime change is in the works, a plan evolving behind the scenes as I write.

In the entire history of the United States, the country has not gone 40 months without a military conflict since at least 1963.⁵¹⁷ There are long periods where the enemy is focused around one vague ideology. Yesterday’s communism is today’s Islamic radicalism: the ‘Red Scare’ is alive and well, it has found a new face to demonize. Today’s wars show no sign of ending.

The Pathocracy has repeatedly exploited crises to implement new legislation with applause that would otherwise be universally panned. 9/11 brought us the Patriot Act and Continuity of Government, which has laid the groundwork for a vast surveillance state and indefinite detention. What crises will be manufactured when the Trans-Pacific Partnership is ready to be officially revealed?

517 Mother Jones, “How the Rest of the World Views the American Military,” August 29, 2013

* * * *

The Deep State

In the United States, and indeed much of the nations around the world, there exist two governments: one that operates out in the open, which the citizens are familiar with and interact with, and a parallel top secret government, whose existence is visible only to a select few and only occasionally exposed to the general public. This clandestine hybrid network of shadowy institutions and figures, both public and private, operates with its own intentions and its own power regardless of who is formally the Head of State.

“The Deep State does not consist of the entire government. It is a hybrid of national security and law enforcement agencies: the Department of Defense, the Department of State, the Department of Homeland Security, the Central Intelligence Agency and the Justice Department. I also include the Department of the Treasury because of its jurisdiction over financial flows, its enforcement of international sanctions and its organic symbiosis with Wall Street. All these agencies are coordinated by the Executive Office of the President via the National Security Council.” – Mike Lofgren⁵¹⁸

The ‘Deep State’ is also largely privatized. The Washington Post has reported that the number of private contractors with top-secret clearances has reached 854,000, a mind-blowing number in itself, and greater than the number of top-secret clearances among civilian employees of the government.⁵¹⁹ Wall Street is also a main component of the ‘Deep State’, by which the very grease that allows the cogs of the machine to run originates. If there is any one thing that the ‘Deep State’ requires, it is silent and uninterrupted cash flow.

The ‘Deep State’ was legalized on September 11, 2001 after George W. Bush declared a state of emergency and enacted the Continuity of Government operations. It is the natural result of the progressive number of power grabs by various intelligence agencies detailed throughout the previous chapters. It is the ‘Deep State’ that is responsible for endless war and the one-party state, effectively ensuring it’s continued existence and importance by providing an impetus for war, surveillance and propaganda while simultaneously removing any possibility of civilian reform.

The ‘Deep State’ is the vehicle from which the Pathocracy operates. It has expanded its operations into drug-running, child trafficking and more, so that it does not have to rely entirely on taxpayer money for its projects. For all intents and purposes, the rise of the ‘Deep State’ can be considered a silent coup on the United States of America.

518 BillMoyers.com, “Essay: Anatomy of the Deep State,” February 21, 2014

519 The Washington Post, “Top Secret America,” an investigate project spanning from 2013 to 2014

* * * *

Cults

When we peel back the layers of the Pathocracy and travel deeper into the rabbit hole, by exploring the depths of trauma-based mind control and child abuse that has become institutionalized among the elite, we are given a glimpse of the world of cults. The reality is that the Pathocracy sits on top of, and in the process conceals and protects, a ‘black’ network of Satanists and other occultists who explore the darkest evils imaginable. The Pathocracy conceals this arm of the octopus because it provides a valuable service to their goals and has a network of lots of influential people.

Furthermore, cults likely operate as ‘psychopathic recruitment centers’. The whole idea of a cult revolves around hidden knowledge and the manipulation of the masses. Psychopaths are drawn to such ideologies, and are then recruited into the broader Pathocracy.

There is no topic that reveals the depths of depravity of the Pathocracy more than their use of pedophilia as a tool for control. It is how they conceal their biggest conspiracies, by holding over the heads of their subjects a type of blackmail that will ensure compliance. In addition, there is no topic that reveals the necessity of action than their abuse of children. And if the extent of this phenomenon can be exposed fully, no truth will bring down their reign quicker.

Unfortunately, it is necessary to paint such a dark picture because the reality is dark, and we cannot pretend that the ‘endgame’ of the Pathocracy does not exist. If resistance to the Pathocracy grows, we must be prepared for the worst, such as a series of major terrorist attacks, wars between major world powers, and the collapse of fiat currency. This is the ‘Big Picture’: An agenda of total control, and events are accelerating as the Octopus tightens the grip of its tentacles around the globe. We are living in grand times, at no point in history has the current moment been so important for the future of humanity.

Fortunately, the Pathocracy is doomed to fail.

* * * *

Chapter XVI: Solutions

The problem of the Pathocracy seems to be so vast and complex; it is certainly intimidating. We are fortunate that the solutions are relatively simple. It begins and ends with education and non-participation. Ignorance is the sole tool that keeps the Pathocracy afloat. It’s truly this easy. An awake populace can collectively choose to stop holding the pyramid above their shoulders by refusing to oil the gears of the machine. We need to collectively move our money out of big banks, support local enterprise over multinational corporations, and be excessively vocal about the truth.

The time to start being as vocal as possible was decades ago. By this I mean that there is no time for anything else anymore. If you are awake, start making waking others up your number one priority. There are few things I desire to do more than to forget all of this and get lost in World of Warcraft. Yet the stakes are too high, there is something bigger going on than our selfish desires. Imagine yourself reflecting on the past in 20, 30 years. Will you be content with the impact you had on the awakening, or will you regret not doing more as the police state becomes fully entrenched around you and it is too late to make a difference?

The first step is to become educated yourself. Be able to articulate the problem to even the most skeptical. Collect information and resources that effectively expose the abuses and inner workings of the Pathocracy. Then take this knowledge and share it. I know I have had reservations about sharing the truth with those who seem so content with their circumstances because shattering worldviews is not a pleasant experience by any means. But it is time to put these reservations aside. The building is on fire, and we need to evacuate before it is too late; those who will be momentarily angry for being slapped awake will be grateful once the gravity of the situation becomes clear.

While a personal discussion is certainly the most valuable tool, there are other means. For example, you can compile the sources and information you find most pertinent and send them out in an anonymous email to your contacts list.⁵²⁰ Perhaps begin your email with “From a concerned friend, please read this information with an open mind”. If 1 out of 100 people is reached this way, the seed will be planted for an inevitable blossom. Ideas follow a pattern of being ridiculed until they reach a critical mass and are accepted. We must endeavor to reach this critical mass as soon as possible, before the grip of the Pathocracy is sufficiently tight enough to prevent the flow of information.

520 If you wish to use this book, please do. There is a reason it is free; so it can reach as many people as possible.

* * * *

One valuable tool we have is alternative currencies, especially crypto currencies. First off, it is a great way to avoid using traditional means of money transfer and bank holdings that prop up the beast. Yet there is another tremendously important value, especially with Bitcoin and potentially with future Bitcoin competitors: It has made the counterculture rich. There are thousands of people who are receptive to the type of information contained in this book who thanks to new found wealth from crypto currencies now have the means to proliferate the truth far and wide. If this applies to you, please consider using your assets for a positive impact, perhaps by placing relevant information in public places, by organizing protests, or supporting independent media.

* * * *

The worst thing we can do is wait for someone else to step up and be a leader, for someone else to organize a movement for us to join, for someone else to take a stand against the Pathocracy. A true paradigm shift has to start from within ourselves. An organization or institution has too much propensity to be led astray or infiltrated. After all, ‘preventing the rise of a messiah’ is a documented top priority of the Pathocracy.

Be the change you want to see in the world, and educate others to do the same. Research where the materials you consume come from, and make smart purchasing choices. Strive to minimize your ‘corporate and government footprint’. It is truly as simple as this, and this chapter can be complete while being one of the shortest in the book. Stop holding the pyramid above us and let it collapse around us, then we can put the important pieces back together without the potential for the massive centralization of covert power that we see today. One by one is how the awakening grows, until it is inevitable.

* * * *

Chapter XVII: The Awakening

The date was December 21, 2012, one day after my graduation from the University of Illinois. I was sitting at home, contemplating life, exhausted from a frenzy of theses, finals and celebrations. I wondered what I would possibly do with a degree in History, a question I had been deftly avoiding throughout my time in school. I wondered if I could ride out my bartending gig into adulthood, wondered how quickly I could get myself out of the suburbs and out of the Midwest.

That night, in my typical fashion of procrastinating instead of facing issues head on, I was lead to the dark corners of the internet. I was not a conspiracy theorist, but I found the topics interesting, and fell head first deep into the rabbit-hole of MKULTRA. A truth so dark and disgusting that I cried: a mountain of evidence that the cabal that I would eventually come to know as the Pathocracy is responsible for a global network of child trafficking and child abuse.

My worldview was flipped upside down the moment it all sunk in. Some call it ‘Waking Up’. I looked at the clock, and the time read 10:33.

* * * *

Synchronicity was described by Carl Jung as ‘temporally coincident occurrences of acausal events’. In other words it means events that are causally unrelated yet experienced together in a meaningful manner, related conceptually with the chance of them occurring together being very small. That evening, I would look at the clock again at 11:33, 12:33 and 1:33. It was the beginning of a lengthy and profound series of synchronicity I would experience with the number.

33 had been my lucky number for quite some time. At age 10, it was the centerpiece of an inside joke for my camp counselors. I didn’t understand the joke, of course, but I emulated them as any 10 year old would. It was the number of my Lacrosse jersey in High School, and my standardized test score. Its labeled on the bottle of one of my favorite beers. Nothing seriously profound, but enough for it to be my number.

I remember being quite hung over on December 21, not just because of celebrating my graduation, but because of a series of parties centered around the end of the Mayan calendar, which some believed predicted the end of the world. Neither my friends nor myself truly thought that the world was going to end, it was just another excuse to get hammered and party as if there was no tomorrow. Yet in hindsight, perhaps this date was not a coincidence. The end of the calendar didn’t intend to predict the end of the world; rather, it reflected the Mayan belief that the end of the calendar era would usher in a new age: The Age of Enlightenment.

In the months proceeding December 21, I would go days, sometimes even weeks at a time seeing :33 on the clock every single hour I was awake. I had been a committed atheist for much of my life. I still understand it to be one of the most rational worldviews. After all, the world is filled with evil and suffering, and the major religions are filled with corruption and hypocrisy. But this was a phenomenon I could not ignore, and decided to explore it further.

It went deeper than just numbers on a clock: I would come to profound thoughts and insights at :33, I met a great friend who had the 33rd ticket at the pub I flipped burgers at to pay the bills, I have frequently and repeatedly published important writing at :33. Following insights from synchronicity brought me to South America, where I met my soulmate and spiritual partner at 6:33 p.m.

I am having a direct communication with God and the experience has been phenomenal.

My experience with synchronicity goes beyond numbers. Reflecting on my life, I am fascinated by how events weaved their way together to put me in exactly the right place at the right time to wake up and to have developed the skills to synthesize this information and share it with others. When I needed to learn an important lesson, the structure of my life evolved to put me into a position to truly internalize new values and ideas, a sort of ‘synchronistic flow’ of events.

The ‘ride’, as the brilliant comedian and commentator Bill Hicks would put it, has not been easy. My whole life has been a series of ‘learning the hard way’. I had to fail out of school to learn the value of learning. I had to spend weeks in a hospital with major burns to get a grip on my issues with drugs and alcohol. I had to get arrested to learn how my actions impact others. I had to experience obesity to learn the value of health and caring for my body. I had to experience deep and prolonged depression to appreciate happiness and action. A whole lot of experiences to synthesize in 23 years of living, but I am grateful for every one of them. They made me who I am today.

In the same sense, humanity is learning the hard way. We have to confront the Pathocracy in order to collectively evolve, to not just blindly follow the next paradigm shift but to actively construct it within ourselves. As the waning Pathocracy clashes with the rising Awakening, there will be a lot of suffering, but we should not be upset: Instead, we should be grateful for the catalyst that will be responsible for the inevitable beautiful renaissance that represents the light at the end of the tunnel.

* * * *

I absolutely wish I could lay out a comprehensive metaphysical thesis here but the truth is, I simply don’t know what the truth is. I do know that at the very bottom of the conspiracy rabbit hole, is that each and every one of us is a powerful spiritual being. We have a part of us that is eternal and perfect, hidden behind layers of ego. Some have more layers than others, and that is OK: Not everyone began their journey at the same time, and eventually we will all finish it.

There is a series of paradoxes: the present we are experiencing is but a blink of an eye along the path of evolution for our souls, yet simultaneously the road ahead of us is of the utmost importance. There is an infinite amount of life not only in this universe but each one that exists beyond it, that has existed before it and will exist after it. Yet, we are each special. This is the nature of infinity: We are not insignificant.

Entering the Age of Enlightenment, and Lifting the Veil, means more than just shining a spotlight on the Pathocracy. While I think the information contained within this book is important, I believe that it’s true significance lies in showing that our collective understanding of reality is vastly incomplete and largely incorrect.

As we move forward, we must base our thoughts and actions not in hate and anger towards the Pathocracy but with love and respect towards one another. This is not only the best means of confronting the problems we face but it is simply the right thing to do. It is time to search deep inside ourselves and hold on tightly to our inner light, develop it and share it with others. Be a catalyst for the beautiful renaissance that is in our future.

As you fight fire not with more fire but with water, fight evil not with evil, but with love. The return of ‘God Consciousness’ to our world, or whichever name you want to give it: This is the true meaning of the Age of Enlightenment and Lifting the Veil, the underlying meaning of the existence of the Pathocracy and the struggles we will face as we confront it.

Don’t forget to share this book with at least two people!

About Me

My name is Timothy Silver. I am 23 years old. I have a Bachelors degree in History from the University of Illinois. I understand that these credentials aren’t going to blow anyone’s mind, which is why I opted for the approach of citing every claim with a publicly available source. After all, I am simply too young to have the advanced degrees that would thrust this work into the spotlight. Does that make the information any less true, any less profound?

I have spent most of my life in Illinois, some of it in Chicago, some in the suburbs, and most of the last five years in Champaign. Currently, I have no permanent address. I am backpacking through South America experimenting with alternative ways of living and experiencing different cultures. My budget is 15 dollars a day and I have temporarily settled in Lima, Peru to spend time with my girlfriend and focus on production of more work related to shining light on the truth. The trip has been phenomenal.

“Lifting the Veil” is my first full project, and I have recently been running a blog called “The Peoples History”. It has been a fantastic experience. I am grateful for all of the positive feedback I have received during this time. I’ve received threats that I consider credible as well, many months before I began writing this book, back when I began raising hell over the suspicious circumstances surrounding the death of Investigative Journalist Michael Hastings. I don’t think there is any value in discussing them in depth other than to make the fact public record. For that reason, I won’t be promoting this book to any significant extent. There is a time for bravery and a time for common sense. If you found the content of this book insightful, please share it with as many people as possible, anonymously if you must. It is the only way these ideas will spread.

Please contact me if you have any questions, and criticism or input, research you think is important, or if you simply want to say hi. I thoroughly enjoy all of the correspondence, and find my opinions and views are constantly being refined through discussing them with others.

Timothy M. Silver
timsilverpeopleshistory@gmail.com

In Memory of Michael Hastings

On July 18, 2013, Investigative Journalist Michael Hastings, the man who single-handedly brought down one of the most powerful men in the military with his reporting,⁵²¹ died in a fiery car crash in Los Angeles.

Suspicious circumstances of his death immediately began streaming in. For example, Hastings had contacted the Wikileaks lawyer just hours before his death worried that he was being followed by the FBI.⁵²²

The next day, an email that Hastings had sent to colleagues was released, titled ‘FBI Investigation re:NSA’. It stated: “I’m on to a big story, and need to go off the radar for a bit.”⁵²³

In a 2012 interview, Hastings revealed that he had received numerous death threats from recent investigative reporting.⁵²⁴ “Yes. Every once and awhile, I’ll get a death threat from someone–like, ‘if we don’t like what you write, we’ll hunt you down and kill you’ kind of thing.”

The autopsy report found that neither drugs nor alcohol played a role in the crash.⁵²⁵ Why, then, have witnesses described Hastings’ vehicle, a Mercedes C250 (a car not prone to bursting into flames) traveling at full speed down a suburban road, crossing a red light and then skipping over a median into a tree, exploding?⁵²⁶ Security footage from a gas station caught the speeding, the crash and the explosion, confirming the eyewitness testimony.⁵²⁷

“Hastings was intensely interested in government surveillance of journalists. In May, the story broke about the Department of Justice obtaining the phone records of Associated Press reporters. A couple weeks later, Edward Snowden’s revelations about the National Security Agency’s massive surveillance program became public. Hastings was convinced he was a target….

One night in June, he came to Thigpen’s apartment after midnight and urgently asked to borrow her Volvo. He said he was afraid to drive his own car. She declined, telling him her car was having mechanical problems.

“He was scared, and he wanted to leave town,” she says.

The next day, around 11:15 a.m., she got a call from her landlord, who told her Hastings had died early that morning. His car had crashed into a palm tree at 75 mph and exploded in a ball of fire.” –LA Weekly⁵²⁸

The type of cyber attack that could have taken control of Hastings’ vehicle is very real, confirmed by independent hackers to a Forbes journalist in a demonstration⁵²⁹, and by the government itself, in a presentation by DARPA, the Defense Advances Research Projects Agency.⁵³⁰

Rest in peace Michael Hastings, and to each and every victim of the Pathocracy. We will pick up where you left off.

521 Rolling Stone Magazine, “The Runaway General,” June 22, 2010

522 US News and World Report, “WikiLeaks: Journalist Michael Hastings Under FBI Investigation Before Death,” June 20, 2013

523 KTLA, “Exclusive: Hastings Sent Colleagues Email Hours Before Crash,” June 21, 2013

524 Reddit AMA, “I am Michael Hastings, a reporter for BuzzFeed and a writer for Rolling Stone.”

525 Los Angeles Times, “Michael Hastings’ Toxicology Report”

526 A local Los Angeles news story interviewing witnesses, available on YouTube here.

527 Surveillance footage, available on YouTube here.

528 LA Weekly, “Michael Hastings’ Dangerous Mind: Journalistic Star Was Loved, Feared and Haunted,” August 22, 2013

529 Forbes, “Hackers Reveal Nasty New Car Attacks–With Me Behind The Wheel,” July 24, 2013

530 Presentation by Kathleen Fisher, DARPA project manager, available on YouTube here.

* * * *

—
http://www.wanttoknow.info/mk/liftingtheveil#7